Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Syed Ali Rizwan Structure Book (Everypdf - Blogspot.com) PDF
Syed Ali Rizwan Structure Book (Everypdf - Blogspot.com) PDF
CHAPTER ONE
1.4. DETERMINACY:
A statically indeterminate structure is the one in which all the reactive components plus the internal forces
cannot be calculated only from the equations of equilibrium available for a given force system.These
equations, of course, are
∑ H = 0, ∑ V = 0 and ∑ M = 0
The degree of indeterminacy for a given structure is, in fact , the excess of total number of reactive
components or excess of members over the equations of equilibrium available.
000
3 + 2 =5
Fig. 1.3.
3 + 3 =6
Fig. 1.4
Stable & Indeterminate to 2nd degree. (Fig. 1.3)
Fig. 1.4. Stable & externally indeterminate to 3rd degree.
2 2 =4
Fig. 1.5.
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 3
3 + 1 + 2 + 2=8
Fig. 1.6.
To make the truss, add two members and one joint and repeat.
Fig 1.7
Let us assume that
j = Total number of joints.
b = Total number of bars.
r = Minimum number of reactive components
required for external stability/determinacy.
b + r = 2j
total number of total number of
unknowns. equations available (at joints).
4 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
A structure is said to have determinacy or indeterminacy only if it is stable. Now we consider some
examples.
4 8
y
2 3 5 7 9 11
x
1 6 10
Fig. 1.8.
b = 11
r = 3 (Minimum external reactions required for external stability/determinacy)
j = 7
b + r = 2j
11 + 3 = 2 × 7
14 = 14
This truss of fig. 1.8 is stable and internally determinate.
4 8 12
1 3 5 13 15
7 9 11
2 6 10 14
Fig. 1.9.
b = 15
r = 3
j = 9
b + r = 2j
15 + 3 = 2 × 9
18 = 18
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 5
4 6 12 15
10
1 3 5 7 9 14 16 18
11
2 8 13 17
Fig. 1.10.
b = 18
r = 3
j = 10
b + r = 2j
18 + 3 = 2 × 10
21 > 20
This truss of fig. 1.10 is stable & internally indeterminate to 1st degree.
2 6 10 13
17
1 3 5 7 16
9 12 14
4 8 11 15
Fig. 1.11.
b = 16
r = 3
j = 10
b + r = 2j
17 + 3 = 2 × 10
20 = 20
This truss is Unstable by inspection although the criterion equation is satisfied. The members in
indicated square may get displaced and rotated due to gravity loads.
Always inspect member positions. Insert one member in the encircled box or manage prevention of
sliding by external supports to make it stable.
NOTE:- The difference between the internal and the external indeterminacy is only in the definition of ‘r’
1.4.3. TOTAL INDETERMINACY
The question of total indeterminacy is of little interest and we have got different equations for
different types of structures. For example, the previous equation, i.e., b + r = 2 j can be used to
check the total degree of indeterminacy of an articulated structure like truss by slightly modifying
the definition of “ r ” which should now be considered as the “total number of reactive
components available”.
6 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
b + r = 2j
2
3
9
4
1
7 8
5 6
Fig. 1.12
Fig. 1.13.
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 7
* In this case the presence of a pin at each end of the link makes one additional type of movement
possible if reaction components are removed. Two condition equations are therefore provided by
the link in terms of algebraic sum of moments equal to zero at the joints of link.
1 2 3
14 18 19
11 15 22
7 8 9 10
13 12 16 20
17 21
4 5 6
00
Fig. 1.14.
(i) External Stability and Determinacy:−
Number of reactions = 3
Number of equations = 3
D=3−3= 0
∴ Externally Stable and Determinate
(ii) Internal Stability and Determinacy:-
b = 22
r = 3
j = 11
b + r = 2j
D = (b+r)−2j
= ( 22 + 3 ) − ( 2 × 11 )
= 25 − 22
D = 3 where D = Degree of indeterminacy.
∴ Stable and indeterminate to 3rd degree.
Example No. 4:
Continuous frame
Fig. 1.15.
External Stability and Determinacy:-
Number of reactions = 9
Number of equations = 3
D = 9−3= 6
∴ Stable and Indeterminate to 6th degree. (fig. 1.15).
8 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Example No. 5:
3
2 4
1 5
Fig 1.16
(i) External Stability And Determinacy :-
Number of reactions = 6
Number of equations = 3
Degree of indeterminacy = 6 − 3 = 3
∴ Stable and externally Indeterminate to 3rd degree.
(ii) Internal Stability and Determinacy :-
b = 6
r = 3, where r is the minimum reactive components required for external
j = 6 stability and determinacy.
2
6
13 14
12
11 10
1 7
9
8
Fig. 1.17.
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 9
Number of reactions = 4
Number of equations = 3
D = 4−3= 1
∴ Stable and indeterminate to Ist degree.
Note: In case of a pin jointed structure, there is one unknown per member and in case of rigid jointed
structure there are three unknowns at a joint.
Example No. 7:
oo
Fig. 1.18.
oo
Fig. 1.19.
10 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
10 14 17
7
3 4
8 11 15 18
5 13 6
9 12 16 19
Fig. 1.20.
10 1
9 11
4 2
7 8
6 5 3
Fig. 1.21.
Number of reactions = 6
Number of equations = 3
D = 6−3=3
∴ Stable and Indeterminate to 3rd degree.
(ii) Internal Stability and Determinacy : -
b
= 11
r
= 3
j
= 9
= (3b+r) −3j
D
= ( 3 × 11 + 3 ) − 3 × 9
= 36 − 27
D = 9
∴ Stable and indeterminate to 9th degree. (Fig. 1.21)
9 10
1 3 5
7 8
2 4 6
Fig. 1.22.
12 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
12
13 11
5 4
6 3
14 7 1 2 10
oo
8 9 oo
Fig. 1.23.
W
M=0
4 7 10 12 15
6 9 14 16 19
3 5 11 17
13
8
1
20
18
2
Fig. 1.24.
M=0 M=0 34 35
W
W
36
r=1 r=1 37
38 39 40
41
42 43
Fig. 1.25.
14 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
M=0
M=0
M=0
M=0
M=0
Fig. 1.26.
2 16 3
14 15
13
12
8 9
1 4
11
10
7
6 oo 5 oo
Elastic curve
A B
θAB= ---
1 (Area of B.M.D.
EI
between A & B)
Tangent at A
θAB
1 (AREA)
θAB= ---
EI AB
Tangent at B
θAB
Tangent at B
A B
Fig 2.1(a)
Tangent at B Fig 2.1 (b)
(a) Positive change of slope, θAB is counterclockwise from the left tangent. (Fig. 2.1a)
(b) Negative change of slope, θAB is clockwise from the left tangent. (Fig. 2.1b)
A B
Elastic curve.
tangent at B
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 17
tangent at A
t BA=Deviation of point B on elastic curve w.r.t.
tangent at point A on elastic curve
A Elastic curve B
(a) Positive Deviation:- B located above the reference tangent. (Tangent at A; Fig. 2.2a)
(b) Negative Deviation:- B located below the reference tangent. (Tangent at A; Fig. 2.2b)
Elastic curve
B
A
t t
AB BA
t t
AB BA
Reference tangent at B Reference tangent at A
Fig. 2.3
positive at a section of a portion being considered as a free body when left resultant force acts
upwards and right resultant force acts downwards. Negative bending moment and shear force
would be just opposite to this.
Compression L
R
Positive B.M. Positive Shear Force
Tension
L R
Tension
A B
C D
oo
Ra Rb
L/4 L/4 L/2
B.M.D. due to Ra = Ra x L
+
- B.M.D. due to P1
3 L
P1 x ---
4
B.M.D. due to P
- L 2
P2 x ---
2
This Relationship has been plotted below. While drawing bending moment diagrams by parts and starting
from left, for example, Ra is acting at A. Imagine that Ra is acting while support at A has been removed and
beam is fixed adequately at B ( just like a cantilever support), the deflected shape whether sagging or
hogging will determine the sign of B.M.D. Similar procedure is adopted for other loads.
x x
where k = constant
n = degree of
curve of
B.M.D A
n h
y=kX
y
i.e. y=PX k=P, n=1
2
y = wx
2 k = w/2, n=2
y X
X dx
b
Fig. 2.6
Generalized variation of B.M. w.r.t. x
∫
Xd A
In general X =
A
Kb(n+1)
A =
(n + 1)
We want to find the total area under the curve in terms of ‘b’ and ‘h’ and for that the constant ‘k’ has to be
evaluated from the given boundary conditions.
At X = b , y = h
Put this in (1) , y = kX n
we get h = kb n
h
or k = n Put this in equation for A above.
b
20 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
h bn+1
A = n Simplifying
b (n+1)
h bn . b
=
bn (n+1)
bh
So A= (2)
(n+1)
Now its centroid would be determined with reference to fig. 2.6..
−
X = ∫ X Ad A
= ∫ X (ydX)
A
Put y= kXn
∫ X kXA dX
n
=
b
k Xn+1 dX h bh
= ∫ Now put k= and A= we have
o A bn (n+1)
b
h/bn (X)n+1 dX
=∫
o bh/(n+1)
b
h (Xn+1) dX(n+1)
= ∫ simplifying step by step
o hbn+1
b
(n + 1)
= ∫ Xn+1dX
b n+1 o
b
(n + 1) Xn+2
=
b n+1 (n+2)o
(n + 1) bn+2
=
b n+1 (n+2)
(n + 1) bn+1 . b
= .
b (n+1) (n+2)
__ b (n+1)
X = (n+2) (3)
−
X is the location of centroid from zero bending moment
From above figure 2.6, we have
− /
X + X = b
/ −
∴ X = b − X
b (n + 1)
= b − Simplify
(n + 2)
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 21
b (n + 2) − b (n + 1)
=
(n + 2)
bn + 2b − bn − b
=
(n + 2)
/ b
X = (4)
(n+2)
bh
A= (2)
(n+1)
Note:- While applying these two formulae to calculate the deflection and the rotation by moment area
method and with diagrams by parts, it must be kept in mind that these two relationship assume zero
−
slope of the B.M. Diagram at a suitable point. It may not be applied to calculate A & X within
various segments of the B.M.D where this condition is not satisfied. Apply the above equations for
area and centroid to the following example.
B
A
θab Cantilever under u.d.l
Elastic curve
L
L
x = ---
4
0
(-)
B.M.D
WL2
2nd degree curve 2
3
A = WL
Fig 2.7 6
22 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Tangent at A on
P Elastic curve.
A L B
ab
= t AB
a
Eleastic
curve
A
B.M.D
X = 2/3L
PL
X = L/3
Fig. 2.8
(−ve) sign in the deflection of diagram below does not mean that area is (−ve) but ordinate of BMD is
(−ve). For loads the fig. 2.7.
1
A×
3L
∆a =
EI 4
1 -WL3 3L
= ×
EI 6 4
−WL4
=
8EI
The reader is reminded to draw conjugate beams for actual beams under loads very carefully by
giving due consideration to support conditions of actual beam. In general for a fixed and free end
of actual beam, the corresponding supports would be free and fixed in conjugate beam
respectively. Deflection ∆ at any point on actual beam is associated with the bending moment at
corresponding point on conjugate beam while rotation θ at any point on actual beam is associated
with shear force at corresponding point on conjugate beam. At an actual hinge support ∆ is equal
to zero and θ is there indicating non development of moment at the support (Shear force present,
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 23
bending moment zero). The corresponding support conditions in conjugate beam would be such
where bending moment is zero and shear force may be there i.e., a hinge is indicated. See the
following example.
A L/2 B
EI=Constt. C Actual beam
under load
PL/4 P/2
P/2
+
1
A = --- x L x PL
--- B.M.D/EI
2 4EI
2
PL
= ---- PL/8EI
8EI
θa = θb = -----
2
PL
16EI Conjugate beam
under M/EI diagram
+ as a load
A/ C
/
B/
L/6
PL2 PL2
PL 2
16EI PL2
16EI
16EI 16EI
Fig. 2.9
PL2 L PL2 L
∆C = Mc′ = × − × (considering forces on LHS of
16EI 2 16EI 6
PL3 PL3 3PL3 − PL3 2EPL3
= − = = point C of shaded area)
32EI 96EI 96EI 96EI
3
PL
∆C =
48EI
L
P
AE = Axial Stiffness
Fig. 2.10
Work done by a gradually increased force ‘P’ is equal to area of load − deflection diagram = P/2 ∆.
(From graph)
… Stress ∝ Strain (Hooke’s Law)
So f ∝ ∈
f = Constt . ∈
f = E.∈
P ∆
= E×
A L
PL 1
so ∆ = Strain energy will be P∆ from above. So putting it we have.
AE 2
P PL
⇒ U = , where U is the internal strain energy stored.
2 AE
2
PL
U = (for single member)
2AE
2
PL
U =Σ (for several members subjected to axial forces)
2AE
L
T2 ds
(3) Strain Energy Due to Torsion:- U = ∫ (Consult a book on strength of Materials). Where
O 2GJ
T is Torque and J is polar moment of inertia.
Mathematically
P
M
∂U
= P Where U is strain energy stored in bending
∂∆
∂U
and = M. Here ∆ is connected with loads and θ with moment.
∂θ
Mathematically,
∂U
=∆
∂P
∂U
and = θ Here ∆ is connected with loads and θ with moment.
∂M
Now for a given beam, various possible Basic determinate structures (BDS) would be given. A
clever choice of BDS for a given structure can reduce the amount of time and labour.
1. First
alternative
θ
θ is present
θ is present
An indeterminate structure can be made determinate in several ways and the corresponding
quantities may be calculated very easily. However, we will notice that a clever choice of making a basic
determinate structure will reduce the time of our computations tremendously. In Figs. 2.11 and 2.12 various
options regarding choice of BDS are given while Figs. 2.13 and 2.14 illustrate how to make conjugate beam
for a given beam using the guidelines stated earlier. Consider another loaded beam in Fig. 2.15.
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 27
P P
A B
Ma
Ra
Fig. 2.15
P P
A
B
Rb has been chosen
B as redundant.
1
A B
Fig. 2.15 b
P P
A
θa B Ma has been
considered as
redundant force.
Fig. 2.16
A ∝a a B
M=1
Fig 2.16a
1.11. Example No. 1:- Analyze the following beam by the force method. Draw S.F. & B.M. diagrams.
SOLUTION :-
P
Ma
L/2 L/2
B
A
EI = Constt.
Rb
Ra
Fig2.17
Number of reactions = 3
Number of equations = 2
Degree of Indeterminacy = 3 − 2 = 1
Indeterminate to Ist degree.
P 1
L/2 L/2 B
+ L B
EI = Constant B bb
B
Fig 2.17a Fig 2.17b B
o BMD due to
applied loads.
2
PL/8
PL/2
L/6 L/3 L/2
I PL2 L L
∆B = − +
EI 8 2 3
I PL2 5L
= − ×
EI 8 6
3
5PL
∆B = −
48EI
I
A L B
L
bb
I Fig 2.18 a
BDS under unit
redundant at B
o o
1 xLxL L2
=
2 2
BMD due
2/3 L Unit redundant
L=Lx1
I L2 2L
δbb = − ×
EI 2 3
30 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
L3
δbb = − , Putting ∆B and δbb in equation (1)
3EI
5PL2 L 3
Rb = − −
48EI / −3EI By putting ∆B and δbb in compatibility equation
5PL3 3EI 5P
= − × 3 =−
48EI L 16
The (− ve) sign with Rb indicates that the direction of application of redundant force is actually
5P
upwards and the magnitude of redundant force Rb is equal to . Apply evaluated redundant at point B.
16
P
3PL
Ma =
16
L/2 L/2
y
x
5P
11P
16 16
Fig. 2.19
∑fy = 0
Ra + Rb = P
5P 11P
Ra = P − Rb = P − = . Now moment at A can be calculated.
16 16
5P L 5PL PL
Direction of applied moment at A = ×L−P. = −
16 2 16 2
5PL − 8PL
=
16
3 PL
= −
16
3 PL
The (−ve) sign with indicates that the net applied moment about ‘A’ is clockwise. Therefore, the
16
reactive moment at the support should be counterclockwise (giving tension at top). Apply loads and
evaluate redundant on the given structure.
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 31
P
Ma = 3PL
16
L/2 L/2
EI = Constant Rb = 5P
11P 16
16
11P
16
+
0 0 S.F.D
5P
5PL 16
32
+
0 0 B.M.D
(-ve) B.M
3PL 8
X= L
16 11
Fig. 2.20
− P X − = 0
5 PX L
MX =
16 2
5 PX PL
= − PX + = 0
16 2
11PX PL
= − + = 0
16 2
PL 11PX
= =
2 16
8L
X=
11
Note:- In case of cantilever, moment − area method is always preferred because slope is absolute
everywhere.
P
L/2 L/2 B
A
EI = Constant
Elastic curve
Fig. 2.21
32 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Solution: (2) As a second alternative, Chose Simply Supported Beam as a basic determinate structure.
diagram on
conjugate beam
L
2 2
6
2 2 L/3EI
(by 1st moment
Fig. 2.21c area theorem)
Fig 2.21d
L
∝ aa =
3EI
PL2
θa = (by 1st moment area theorem)
16EI
For fixed end, there is no rotation. Therefore compatibility equation becomes
θ a + Ma ∝ aa = 0 (slope at A created by loads + slope at A created
θa
So Ma = − by redundant should be zero).
∝aa
θ a & ∝ aa are the flexibility co−efficients. Putting these in compatibility equation
PL2 3EI
we have, Ma = − ×
16EI L
3PL
Ma = −
16
The (−ve) sign with Ma indicates that the net redundant moment is in opposite direction to that
assumed. Once Ma is known, Ra and Rb can be calculated.
3PL
16 P
L/2 L/2 B
A
EI = Constant
L 3PL
Rb × L − P × + = 0
2 16
PL 3PL
Rb × L = −
2 16
8 PL − 3 PL
=
16
5PL
Rb × L =
16
5P
Rb =
16
∑fy = 0
Ra + Rb = P so Ra = P − Rb
5P
= P −
16
11P
Ra =
16
Note:- In case of simply supported beam, conjugate beam method is preferred for calculating slopes and
deflections.
1.12. Example No. 2:- Analyze the following beam by the force method. Draw S.F. and B.M. diagrams.
SOLUTION :-
WKN/m Mb
Ma
A B
EI = Constant
Ra Rb
No. of reactions = 4
No. of equations = 2
Degree of Indeteminacy = 4 - 2 = 2
Indeterminate to 2nd degree.
Fig. 2.23
Choosing cantilever with support at A as BDS. Vertical reaction at B and moment at B will be
redundants. To develop compatibility equations at B regarding translation and rotation at B, we imagine the
BDS under applied loads and then under various redundants separately.
34 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
WKN/m
B
A
B
B
L b
Fig. 2.23a B.D.S under loads tangent at B
1
+
B
A
EI = con bb
st ant
L B
bb
B
L bb
Now we evaluate ∆B, θb, δbb, α'bb, δ'bb and ∝bb with the help of moment area theorems
separately, where ∆ = Deflection at B in BDS due to applied loads
θb = Rotation at B in BDS due to applied loads.
WKN/m
WL2 B
2 A
WL
L
B.D.S. under loads
Fig. 2.24a
B.M.S. due to 3L
applied loads. X = L/4 4
0 0
B.M.D
3
WL
WL 2 6
2
bh L × (− WL2) WL3
A = = = − b = width of BMD.
(n+1) (2+1) 6
h = ordinate of BMD.
b L L
X′ = = = By applying second theorem of moment area, we have
n+2 (2 + 2) 4
1 WL3 3 WL4
∆B = − × L = −
EI 6 4 8EI
1 WL3 WL3
θb = − = −
EI 6 6EI
36 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1
L B
A
L
Fig. 2.24b B.M.D. due to unit redundant force at B
1 x L x L = L2
2 2
0 0
L L/3 2L/3
1 L2 2 L3
δbb = − × L = − ; δbb = Deflection at B due to unit redundant at B
EI 2 3 3EI
1 L2 L2
α′bb = − = − ; α′bb = Rotation at B due to unit redundant at B
EI 2 2EI
1 1
A B
δbb
/
B α′bb
L
Fig. 2.24c B.D.S under unit redundant
moment at B
Lx1=L
L/2
0 0
B.M.D
1 1
1 L2
−L× = −
L
δ′bb =
EI 2 2EI
1 L
∝bb −L = −
EI [ ]
=
EI
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 37
Putting values in second equation, we have (2) multiply by 6 and simplify to get
WL3 Vb x L2 L x Mb
− − − = 0 equation (4)
6EI 2EI EI
− 3 WL4 − 8 L3 × Vb − 12 L2 × Mb = 0 (3)
or 3 WL4 + 8 L3 Vb + 12 L2 Mb = 0 (3)
− WL3 − 3 L2 Vb − 6 L Mb = 0 (4)
or WL3 + 3 L2 Vb + 6 L Mb = 0 (4)
3 WL4 + 8 L3 Vb + 12 L2 Mb = 0 (3)
2 WL4 + 6 L3 Vb + 12 L2 Mb = 0 (4)
WL4 + 2 L3 Vb = 0
WL4 = − 2 L3 Vb
WL4
Vb = −
2L3
WL
Vb = −
2
The (−ve) sign with Vb shows that the unit redundant load at B is in upward direction.( Opposite
to that assumed and applied)
Putting the value of Vb in (3)
3 WL4 + 8 L3 − WL + 12 L2 Mb = 0
2
or 3 WL4 − 4 WL4 + 12 L2 Mb = 0
WL4 = 12 L2 Mb
WL4
Mb =
12L2
WL2
Mb =
12
The ( +ve) sign with Mb indicates that the assumed direction of the unit redundant moment at B
is correct. Now apply the computed redundants at B and evaluate and apply reactions at A.
38 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
WKN/m
2
Ma= WL Mb= WL
2
12 A B
12
Va=WL/2 L Vb=WL/2
Fig. 2.25
WL2
24
0 0
B.M.D
WL2 WL2
12 12
0.789 L
Points of Contraflexure : -
WL WL2 WX2
Mx = X − − = 0
2 12 2
12
Multiply by and re-arrange.
W
6 X2 − 6 LX + L2 = 0
6L ± 36 L2 − 4 × 6 × L2
X = +
2×6
6L ± 36 L2 − 24 L2
=
12
6L ± 12 L2
=
12
6L ± 2 3 L2
=
12
6 L ± 3.464 L
=
12
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 39
9.464 L 2.536 L
= ,
12 12
L2
LX′ − − X′2 = 0
6
L2
X′2 − LX′ + = 0
6
L2
L± L2 − 4 × 1 ×
6
X′ =
2×1
2 L2
L ± L2 −
3
=
2
L2
L ±
3
=
2
1 2
L ± .L
3
=
2
L ± 0.577 L
X′ =
2
X′ = 0.211 L
We get the same answer as before.
This is a flexibility method and was written in matrix form earlier. The matrix inversion process is
given now for reference and use.
40 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
-35 -28 0
Matrix of Minors= -37 -45 -14
-8 -19 -7
-35 28 0
Matrix of co-factors = 37 -45 14
-8 19 -7
-35 37 -8
Adjoint of matrix A = 28 -45 19
0 14 -7
1
-35 37 -8
Inverse of matrix =
49 28 -45 19
0 14 -7
40 kN
A B C D
3m 4m 5m
EI = constant
Fig. 2.26
In this case, we treat reaction at B and C as redundants and the basic determinate structure is a
simply supported beam AD.
40 kN
A D
B C
Fig. 2.26 a
Bending under applied loads
1
A B C D
bb cb
Fig. 2.26 b
Bending under unit redundant force at B
A B C D
bc cc
Fig. 2.26 c
Bending under unit redundant force at C
42 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
A B C D’
M diagram
5.67 6.33 EI
W
a b
L
Wab
M=
L
L+a L+b
3 3
Fig. 2.27
369.455
RA′ =
EI
∑Fy = 0
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 43
369.455 700.02
RA′ + RD′ = + RD' =
EI EI
700.02 369.455
RD′ = −
EI EI
330.565 M
RD′ = . Now ordinates of diagram are determined by comparing
EI EI
Similar triangles.
116.67 Y 70
= ⇒ Y=
5 EI 3 EI
∆B =
1 369.455 × 3 − 1 × 3 × 70 × 3
EI 2 3
1003.365
∆B = KN − m3
EI
Determine
116.67 Y
=
7 5
Y = 83.34
1
330.565 × 5 − × 5 × 83.34 ×
1 5
∆C =
EI 2 3
1305.575
∆C = KN − m3
EI
1
A 3m B 4m C 5m D
bb cb
Fig. 2.28
2/3 1/3
2.25/EI
1.25/EI
A B C D
13.5
5 7
bc cc
1x7x5
2.92 12
=2.92
2.92
EI
bc cc
A D
B C
8.28 9.24
EI 6.33 m 5.67 m
17.52
EI
Fig. 2.29 Conjugate beam under M/EI
Multiply (3) by 22.92 and (4) by 20.25 & subtract (4) from (3)
Rb = − 25.434 KN
The ( −ve) signs with the values of the redundants are suggestive of the fact that the directions of
the actual redundants are in fact upwards. Now apply loads and evaluated redundants to original beam
calculate remaining reaction.
A B C D
3m 4m 5m
Fig. 2.30
Elastic curve
Fig. 2.31
S.F.D.
B.M.D.
X1 = 3.663 m from A.
19.168 X2 − 106.32 = 0
X2 = 5.547 m.
inner sides
outer sides outer sides
Fig. 2.33c B.D.S. under unit vertical Fig. 2.33d B.D.S. under unit rotational
redundant force at D redundant moment at D
48 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Compatibility equations :-
∆DH + HD × δddh + VD × δ′ddv + MD × ∝′ddh = 0 (1) Compatibility in horizontal direction at D.
∆DV + HD × δ′ddh + VD × δddV + MD × ∝′ddV = 0 (2) Compatibility in vertical direction at D.
θD + HD × ∝′ddh + VD × ∝′ddv + MD × ∝dd = 0 (3) Compatibility of rotation at D
Now evaluate flexibility co-efficients used in above three equations. We know that
∫ EI
1
∆ or θ = ( Mmdx )
There are 12 co-efficients to be evaluated in above three equations.
M × mH
So ∆ DH = ∫ EI
dx (1)
(mH)2 dx
δddh = ∫ EI
(2)
∫
mH mv dx
δ′ddh = (3)
EI
M × (mv ) dx
∆ Dv = ∫ EI
(4)
(mH × mv ) dx
δ′ddv = ∫ EI
(5)
(mv)2 dx
δ ddv = ∫ EI
(6)
mv × mθ
∝′ddv = ∫ EI
dx (7)
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 49
∫ ( M ) ( m θ ) dx
1
θD = (8)
EI
1
EI ∫
∝′ddh = ( mH ) ( m θ ) dx (9)
∫ ( mv ) ( mθ ) dx
1
∝′ddv = (10)
EI
∫
1
∝dd = ( mθ )2 dx (11)
EI
Multiplying the corresponding moment expressions in above equations, we can evaluate above
deformations. Draw M-diagram.
10KN
B 2m 2m C
F
4m
3m
20 KN
E
D
3m
x
80 KN-m
A 20KN
M - Diagram
10KN
M = 10 x 2 + 20 x 3 = + 80KN-m
Fig. 2.34 B.D.S under applied loads
M – Diagram by parts
10KN
20KN-m 10KN
x x
20KN-m B C
B F
2m 2m C
x 3m
4m
10KN
20KN
E
x D
3m
80KN-m
x 20KN
M=20 x 6-20 x 3 - 80 = 20KN-m
A
10KN
50 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
4
4 B F C
B C 1 1
4m +
B 4
1 1 C
4m
E 6m
1 D 1
D
A 2
A
2
1 1
MH - Diagram
4 1
1 1
B C 1 B C
F C F 1
B 4 B
1 1 C
1
E E
D 1
D
1
A A
4 1
1 mv-diagram (by parts) m -diagram (by parts)
∫
1
∆DH = M ( mH ) dX
EI
1
3 3 2
EI o
∆DH = ∫ (20X − 80) (X − 2) dX + ∫ (−X+4) (−20) dX + ∫ (10X − 20) 4 dX + 0 + 0
o o
1
3 3 2
EI o
= ∫ (20X2 − 80X − 40X + 160 ) + ∫ (20X − 80 )dX+∫ ( 40X − 80 ) dX
o o
1 20X3 80X2 4X2
3 3 4
20X2 40X2
+ 160X + − 80X | +
=
EI 3
−
2
−
2 o 2 o 2 − 80 X o
1 20 × 33
= − 40 × 32 − 20 × (3)2 + 160 × 3 + (10 × 9 − 80 × 3) + (20 × 4 − 80 × 2)
EI 3
110
∆ DH = −
EI
∫ ( mH )
1
δ ddh = 2
dX
EI
1
3 3 2 2 4
EI o
= ∫ (X − 2)2 dX +∫ (−X + 0)2dX +∫ 16 dX +∫ 16 dX + ∫ X2 dX
o o o o
1
3 3 2 2 4
EI o
δddh = ∫ (X − 4X + 4) dX + ∫ (16 − 8X + X2) dX + ∫ 16 dX + ∫ 16 dX + ∫ X2 dX
o o o o
1 X3 4X2 X3
3 3 2 2 4
8X2 X3
=
EI 3
−
2
+ 4X | +16X −
2
+
3 o
| + 16X | + 16X | +
3 o
o o o
3 3
(4)3
= − 2 (3)2 + 4 × 3 + 16 × 3 − 4 × 9 + + (16 × 2) + (16 × 2) + − 0
1 3 3
EI 3 3 3
109.33
δddh =
EI
∫ ( mH ) ( mv ) dX
1
δ'ddV =
EI
1
3 3 2 2
EI o
= ∫ (X − 2) ( − 4 ) dX + ∫ (−X + 4 ) (−4 ) dX + ∫ ( 4 ) (X−4 ) dX + ∫ 4 (−X ) dX + 0
o o o
1
3 3 2 2
EI o
= ∫ (− 4X+8 ) dX +∫ (4X − 16 ) dX + ∫ (4X−16 ) dX + ∫ − 4XdX
o o o
1 4X2 4X2
3 3 2 2
4X2 4X2
= −
EI 2
+ 8X | + −16X | + − 16X | + −
2
o 2 o 2 o o
52 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1
− 2 × (3)2 + 8 × 3 + (2 × 32 − 16 × 3 ) + ( 2 × 22 − 16 × 2 ) + ( − 2 × 22 )]
EI [
=
56
δ′ddV = −
EI
∫ ( mH ) ( mθ ) dX
1
∝′ddh =
EI
1
3 3 2 2 4
EI o
= ∫ (−1 ) (X − 2) dX + ∫ (−1) (−x + 4) dX + ∫ − 4 dX + ∫ − 4 dX + ∫ − XdX
o o o o
1 X2 X2
3 3 2 2 4
X2
= −
EI 2
+ 2X | +
2
−4X | + − 4X | + − 4X | + −
2 o
o o o o
1 9 42
− + 2 × 3 + − 4 × 3 + (− 4 × 2) + (− 4 × 2) + − − 0
9
=
EI 2 2 2
30
α′ddh = −
EI
∫ M ( mθ ) dX
1
θD =
EI
1
3 3 2
EI o
= ∫ − (20X − 80 ) dX + ∫ 20 dX + ∫ (−10X + 20 ) dX + 0 + 0
o o
1 20X2
3 3 2
10X2
=
EI
− + 80X | + 20X | + − + 20X |
2 o o 2 o
1
=
EI [
(−10 × 3 + 80 × 3) + (20 × 3) + (− 5 × 4 + 20 × 2)
2
]
230
θD =
EI
∫ M ( mv ) dX
1
∆ Dv =
EI
1
3 3 2
EI o
= ∫ (20X − 80) (−4) dX + ∫ (−20) (−4) dX + ∫ (10X − 20) (X − 4) dX + 0 + 0
o o
1
3 3 2
EI o
= ∫ (− 80X + 320) dX + ∫ 80 dX + ∫ (10X2 − 20X − 40X + 80) dX
o o
1
3 3 2
X2 X3 60X2
=
EI
− 80 + 320X | + 80X | + 10 − + 80X |
2 o o 3 2 o
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 53
1
(−40 × 9 + 320 × 3) + (80 × 3) + × 8 − 30 × 4 + 80 × 2
10
=
EI 3
906.67
∆Dv =
EI
∫ ( mH ) ( mv ) dX
1
δ′ddh =
EI
1
3 3 2 2
EI o
= ∫ (X−2) (−4) dX + ∫ (−X + 4) (−4) dX + ∫ 4 (X−4) dX + ∫ − 4XdX + 0
o o o
1
3 3 2 2
EI o
= ∫ (−4X + 8)dX + ∫ (4X − 16) dX + ∫ (4X − 16) dX + ∫ − 4XdX
o o o
1 4X2 4X
3 3 2 2
4X2 4X2
= −
EI 2
+ 8X | +
2
− 16X | +
2
− 16X | +
2 o
o o o
1
=
EI [
(−2 × 9 + 8 × 3) + (2 × 9 − 16 × 3) + (2 × 4 − 16 × 2) + (−2 × 4) ]
56
δ′ddh = −
EI
∫ ( mv ) dX
1
δddv = 2
EI
1
3 3 2 2
EI o
= ∫ 16 dX + ∫ 16 dX + ∫ (X − 4)2 dX + ∫ (−X)2dX + 0
o o o
1
3 3 2 2
EI o
= ∫ 16 dX+∫ 16 dX+∫ (X2 − 8X +16)dX+∫ + X2 dX
o o o
1 X3
3 3 2 2
X3 8X2
=
EI
16X | + 16X | +
3
−
2
+ 16X | + | +
3 o
o o o
1
(16 × 3 ) + ( 16 × 3 ) + − 4 × 4 + 16 × 2 + +
8 8
=
EI 3 3
117.33
δddv =
EI
54 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∫ mv × mθ dX
1
∝′ddv =
EI
1
3 3 2 2
EI o
= ∫ + 4 dX + ∫ + 4 dX + ∫ (−X + 4) dX + ∫ XdX
o o o
1 X2
3 3 2 2
X2
= 4X | + 4X | + −
EI o 2
+ 4X | + |
2 o
o o
1 22
= (4 × 3) + (4 × 3) + (−2 + 4 × 2) +
EI 2
32
∝′ddv =
EI
∫ ( mθ )
1
∝dd = 2
dX
EI
1
3 3 2 2 4
EI o
= ∫ (−1)2 dX + ∫ (−1)2 dX + ∫ (−1)2 dX + ∫ (−1)2 dX + ∫ (−1)2 dX
o o o o
1
3 3 2 2 4
EI
= X | + X | + X | + X | + X |
o o o o o
=
1
EI
[3 + 3 + 2 + 2 + 4 ]
14
∝dd =
EI
906.67 56 117.33 32
and − × HD + × VD + M = 0 (2)
EI EI EI EI D
230 30 32 14
and − × HD + × VD + M = 0 (3) Simplifying
EI EI EI EI D
From Eq (1)
−110 + 109.33 HD − 56 VD
MD = = −3.67 + 3.64 HD − 1.86 VD → (4)
30
Putting in Eq (2)
906.67 − 56 HD + 117.33 VD + 32 (−3.67 + 3.64 HD − 1.86 VD) = 0
906.67 − 56 HD + 117.33 VD − 117.44 + 116.5 HD − 59.52 VD = 0
789.23 + 60.5 HD + 57.81 VD = 0
HD = −13.045 − 0.95 VD → (5)
VD = − 12.478 KN
Apply the evaluated structural actions in correct sense on the frame. The correctness of solution
can be checked afterwards by equilibrium conditions.
10KN
B C
2m 2m
3m 4m
20KN
15.08KN=m
D
6.61KN
3m
Ma=1.8 KN 12.478 KN
A Ha=13.39 KN
Va = 2.478 KN
∑Fx = 0
20 − Ha − 6.61 = 0
Ha = 13.39 KN
∑Fy = 0
Va + 12.478 − 10 = 0 (asuming Va upwards)
Va = − 2.478 KN
0
Ma+ 20 × 3 + 10 × 2 − 12.478 × 4 − 6.61 × 2 − 15.08 = 0 (assuming Ma
clockwise)
Ma = − 1.8 KN-m
ΣMa = 0 12.478 × 4 + 15.08 + 6.61 × 2 + 1.8 − 20 × 3 − 10 × 2 = 0 Proved.
(1) Trusses containing excessive external reactive components than those actually required
for external stability requirements.
(2) Trusses containing excessive internal members than required for internal stability
requirements giving lesser the number of equations of equilibrium obtained from various
joints.
(3) A combination of both of the above categories i.e. excessive external reactions plus
excessive internal members.
INTERNAL INDETERMINACY:-
b + r = 2j
There are two equations of equilibrium per joint where
b = number of bars or members.
r = minimum number of external reactive components required for
external stability (usually 3).
j = number of joints.
The above formula can also be used to check the total indeterminacy of a truss if we define ‘r’ as
the total number of reactive components which can be provided by a typical support system.
1.17. METHOD OF MOMENTS AND SHEARS :
A simple method is presented to evaluate axial member forces in parallel chord trusses. For other
types of trusses method of joints, method of sections or Maxwell’s diagram may be used. For determining
forces in members of trusses, this method has been used throughout this text. To develop the method,
consider the truss loaded as shown below:
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 57
2P 3P
E F G H
A D
7 B C
RA = 3 P
3@ a 8
RD = 3 P
Fig. 2.36 A typical Truss under loads
Consider the equilibrium of L.H.S. of the section. Take ‘D’ as the moment centre: we find Ra
Ra × 3a = 2P × 2a + 3 P × a
7Pa 7P
Ra = =
3a 3
∑ Mc = 0 and assuming all internal member forces to be tensile initially, we have
Ra x 2a − 2P × a + SFG × h = 0 (considering forces on LHS of section)
Ra × 2a − 2 Pa
or SFG = −
h
The ( −ve ) sign indicates a compressive force. Or
SFC = Ra − 2P where Ra − 2P is equal to shear force V due to applied loads at
Cos θ
the section. So in general the force in any inclined member is a
function of shear force.
V
SFC =
Cosθ
Where V is the S.F. at the section passing through the middle of inclined member and ‘θ‘ is the
angle measured from “the inclined member to the vertical” at one of its ends. Use (+ve) sign as a pre-
multiplier with the Cosθ if this angle is clockwise and (−ve) sign if θ is anticlockwise. Take appropriate
sign with the S.F also. This treatment is only valid for parallel chord trusses.
The force in the vertical members is determined by inspection or by considering the equilibrium of
forces acting at the relevant joints. To illustrate the method follow the example below.
1.17.1: EXAMPLE :− Analyze the following truss by the method of moment & shear.
SOLUTION:- Determine reactions and Draw SFD and BMD.
P P P
I J K L M N O
h
A H
P B C D E F G
1.5P 8@a
1.5P
Given Truss under loads
1.5 P
0.5P
0 0
S.F.D.
0.5P
1.5 P
4.5 Pa 5 Pa 4.5 P
3 Pa
1.5Pa 3 Pa
1.5 Pa
B.M.D.
0
Fig. 2.37
TOP CHORD MEMBERS.
Considering the beam analogy of truss, all top chord members are in compression. Picking bending
moment, at appropriate moment centers, from BMD and dividing by height of Truss.
3 Pa
Sij = −
h
3 Pa
Sjk = −
h
5 Pa
Stl = −
h
5 Pa
Slm = −
h
3 Pa
Smn = −
h
3 Pa
Sno = − Negative sign means compression.
h
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 59
SOLUTION:-
36KN 72KN
F G H I J
1.8m
A E
B C D
4 @ 1.8m
Fig. 2.38 Given Truss under loads
TOTAL INDETERMINACY :-
b+r = 2j where r = total reactions which the supports are capable of providing.
17 + 4 ≠ 2 × 10
21 ≠ 20
D = 21 − 20 = 1
Indeterminate to Ist degree.
Apply check for Internal Indeterminacy :-
b + r = 2j where r = Minimum number of external reactions required for stability.
17 + 3 = 2 × 10
20 = 20
This truss is internally determinate and externally indeterminate to 1st degree, therefore, we select
reaction at point “C” as the redundant force. Remove support at C, the Compatibility equation is :
∆ C + δcc × Rc = 0 (Deflection at C due to loads plus due to redundant
should be zero.)
∆c
or Rc = − . Now we have to calculate ∆c and δcc to get Rc.
δcc
F′ UL
where ∆c = ∑ where F' = Force induced in members due to applied loads
AE
acting on BDS.
2
U L
δcc = ∑ U = Forces in members due to Unit load applied in direction
AE
of applied loads, at external redundant support in BDS.
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 61
36K 72K
F G H I J
1.8m
A E
B C C D
4 @ 1.8m
.
(F-Diagram)
G H J
F
A C E
B cc 1 D
1.8m
A E
B C D
4 @ 1.8m Re = 45 KN
1
Ra = 63 /
(F -Diagram)
63
27
+
0
0
S.F.D.
45 45
113.4 162
81
B.M.D.
0 0
62 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Determine forces in all members of trusses loaded as shown in this question and enter the results in a tabular
form. (using method of moments and shears, F' and U values for members have been obtained).
F G H I J
A E
B C 1 D
½ U=Diagram
½
+ S.F.D.
1.8
0.9 0.9
+
B.M.D.
F′ UL
∆C= ∑ = 1.02596 × 10−3 = 1025.96 × 10−6 m
AE
U2 L
δ cc = ∑ = 11.1 × 10−6 m . Putting these two in original compatibility equation
AE
∆C −1025.96 × 10−6
Rc = − =
δcc 11.1 × 10−6
Rc = − 92.5 KN.
The (−ve) sign with Rc shows that the assumed direction of redundant is incorrect and Rc acts upward.
If Fi is net internal force due to applied loading and the redundants, acting together, then member forces an
calculated from
Fi = Fi′ − Rc × Ui
The final axial force in any particular member can be obtained by applying the principle of superposition
and is equal to the force in that particular member due to applied loading ( ± ) the force induced in the
same member due to the redundant with actual signs.
Apply the principle of superposition and insert the magnitude of redundant Rc with its sign which has been
obtained by applying the compatibility condition to calculate member forces.
1.19. SOLUTION OF 2ND DEGREE EXTERNALLY INDETERMINATE TRUSSES:-
Example-6 : Solve the following truss by consistent deformation method use previous
member properties.
36KN 72KN
F G H I J
1.8m
A E
B C D
4 @ 1.8m
36KN 72KN
1.8m
C D
63KN 45KN
/
(F -diagram)
0 63 S.F.D.
45
0
B.M.D.
0 162
113.4 81
+
0
Fig 2.42a B.D.S under loads
64 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
cc 1 dc
1
1 (U1 diagram) 2
2
+
1 S.F.D.
1.8 2
0.9 0.9
(+)
0 0 B.M.D.
+
cd dd
0.25 0.75
1
(U2 diagram)
0.25
(+)
0 0
(-) S.F.D.
0.75
1.35
0.9
0.45 (+)
B.M.D.
0 0
U22L
δdd = ∑ = 9.3565 × 10−6 m
AE
U1U2L
δcd = ∑ = 6.291 × 10−6 m
AE
U1U2L
δdc = ∑ = 6.291 × 10−6 m Put these in equations 1 and 2
AE
1026.2 × 10 + 11.1 × 10 Rc + 6.291 × 10−6 Rd = 0
−6 −6
→ (1)
579.82 × 10−6 + 6.291 × 10−6 Rc + 9.3565 × 10−6 Rd = 0 → (2)
Simplify
1026.2 + 11.1 Rc + 6.291 Rd = 0 → (3)
579.82 + 6.291 Rc + 9.3565 Rd = 0 → (4)
From (3)
−1026.2 − 6.291 Rd
Rc = → (5)
11.1
Put Rc in (4) & solve for Rd
−1026.2 − 6.291 Rd
579.82 + 6.291
11.1 + 9.3565 Rd = 0
− 1.786 + 5.791 Rd = 0
Rd = + 0.308 KN
Rc = − 92.625 KN
∴ Rc = − 92.625 KN
Rd = + 0.308 KN
These signs indicate that reaction at C is upwards and reaction at D is downwards.
By superposition, the member forces will be calculated as follows
Fi = Fi + Rc × U1 + Rd × U2 which becomes.
Fi = Fi − Rc × U1 + Rd × U2. It takes care of (−ve) sign with Rc.
Equilibrium checks:−
0.308
1.082 1.082
0.308
Joint D
∑ Fx = 0
∑ Fy = 0
Equilibrium is satisfied. Only check at one joint has been applied. In fact this check should be
satisfied at all joints.
66 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Table 79−A
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 67
36KN 72KN
F 0 G 2.471 H 2.471 I 0 J
23.722 27.178 72 1.519
1.954 0.308 0
0 0
A 1.082 1.082 E
16.765 B16.765 C D
∑MA = 0
Re × ∆ × 1.8 − 0.308 × 3 × 1.8 + 92.625 × 2 × 1.8 − 72 × 2 × 1.8 − 36 × 1.8 = 0
Re = − 1.082 KN
As Ra + Re = 15.863
So Ra = 15.863 + 1.082
Ra = 16.945 KN
Now truss is determinate. Calculate member forces and apply checks in them.
Joint (C)
∑Fx = 0
27.178 72 1.954
16.765 1.082
92.625
− 1.082 − 16.765 − 1.954 × 0.707 + 27.178 × 0.707 = 0
− 0.0136 = 0
0 ≅0 equilibrium is satisfied.
∑Fy = 0
− 72 + 92.625 − 1.954 × 0.707 − 27.178 × 0.707 = 0
0.0286 = 0
0≅0 equilibrium is satisfied
68 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Joint (E)
∑Fy = 0
1.519
1.082
1.082
∑Fx = 0
082 − 1.519 × 0.707 = 0
0=0 equilibrium is satisfied.
1.8m
A E
B C D
4 @ 1.8m
=
36 KN 72 KN
F G H I J
1.8m
A E
B B C C D
D
+
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 69
bb cb
1 db
Fig 2.44(b) B.D.S under redundant unit load at B
(U1 diagram)
F G H I J
1
A E
B bc cc D dc
C
1
Fig 2.44(c) B.D.S under redundant unit load at C
(U2 diagram)
+
F G H I J
1
A E
B bd C cd D dd
1
Fig 2.44(d) B.D.S under redundant unit load at D
(U3 diagram)
36 KN 72KN
F G H I J
173.4 81
+
B.M.D.
The above SFD and BMD are used to calculate member forces by method of moments and shears. Finally
∆B, ∆C and ∆D due to applied loads on BDS are calculated in a tabular form as given below:
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 71
Table 84−A
72 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1.3
0.9
(+) 0.45
B.M.D.
Same as above
0.25 1 0.75
0.25
(+)
(-) SDF
1.3 0.75
(+)
BMD
From the previous table we have the values of all flexibility co-efficients as given below:
∆B=391.65 × 10−6 m
∆C=1026.2 × 10−6 m
∆D=692.42 × 10−6 m
δbb = 9.3616 × 10−6 m, and δcc = 11.1 × 10−6 m, δdd = 9.3565 × 10−6 m
δbc = δcb = 6.417 × 10−6 m
δbd = δdb = 3.517 × 10−6 m
δcd = δdc = 6.291 × 10−6 m
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 73
Rc = − 111.374 KN
Rb = +32.797 KN
Put Rb and Rc values in equation (4) to get Rd.
After reactions have been calculated, truss is statically determinate and member forces can be easily
calculated by Fi = Fi/ + RbU1 + RcU2 + RdU3 as given in table. Apply checks on calculated member forces.
Joint (C)
72
51.814 3.828
32.058 2.047
111.374
∑ Fx = 0
− 2.047 − 32.058 − 3.828 × 0.707 + 51.814 × 0.707 = 0
− 0.179 ≅ 0
0=0
∑ Fy = 0
111.374 − 72 − 3.828 × 0.707 − 51.814 × 0.707 = 0
0.035 ≅ 0
0 = 0 (satisfied) Solution is alright.
1.21: ANALYSIS OF 3-DEGREE REDUNDANT FRAMES
Example No. 8: Analyze the following frame by consistent deformation method.
96KN
B 3m 6m
C
F 3I
3m
2I
36KN
E
3m I 7.5m
A
D
SOLUTION :-
The given frame is statically indeterminate to the 3rd degree. So that three redundants have to be
removed at support D or A. Consider HD, VD & MD as the redundants
96KN
B 3m 6m C
F 3I
3m
2I
36KN
E
3m I 7.5m
A
=
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 75
96KN
B 3m 6m C
3m 3I
36KN E
2I I 7.5m
2m
36KN
396KN-m
D DH
A
96KN Dv
D
B 3m F 6m C B 9m C B 3m 6m C
3m F 3m F
E E 6m
7.5m
7.5m + 3m
3m
1.5 A
A 1 1
1.5m
9 1 D
1 dh d
1 dvdv dhdv dvd
1
D 1
dvdh d d
dh dh d dv
d dh
M × mH
∆DH = ∫ EI
dX
M × mV
∆DV = ∫ EI
dX
∫
M x mθ
θD = dX
EI
(mH)2 dX
δdhdh = ∫ EI
(mv)2 dX
δdvdv = ∫ EI
mH × mθ
αdθdh = αdhdθ = ∫ EI
dX
mv × mH
δdhdv = δdvdh = ∫ EI
dX from law of reciprocals deformations
mv × mθ
αdθdv = αdvdθ = ∫ EI
dX
m2θ
αdθdθ = ∫ EI
dX
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 77
B 3m 6m C
96KN
F
96KN
C
B 288KN-m
3m
36KN E
7.5m
3m
36KN
A
396KN-m
D
96KN
Fig 2.46 B.D.S under loads (M-diagram)
ΣMb = 0
Mb + 36 × 6 − 396 − 36 × 3 = 0
Mb = + 288 KN − m.
ΣMc = 0
Mc + 96 × 9 − 288 − 96 × 6 = 0
Mc + 0 = 0
Mc = 0
Free body m − Diagrams
7.5 7.5 9
1 B C B 3m 6m C
1 1 1
B 3m F 6m 7.5 F
1
1 C 1
7.5 9 C
3m 3m
E E
7.5m 7.5m
3m
1.5 3m
1
9
A D
D 1
M 1 1
Fig. 2.46a mH-Diagam Fig. 2.46b
M mv-diagram
78 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
B 3m F 6m C
1 1
B 1 C
1
3m
E
7.5m
3m
1 D
∫ M × mH dX
1
∆DH =
EI
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1
= ∫ (36X −396)(X+1.5 )dX+ ∫ (−288)(−X+7.5) dX + ∫ (96X−288)(7.5)dX + ∫ 0 + ∫ 0
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o o o
3 3 3
1 1 1
= ∫ (36X2+54X −396X − 594) dX + ∫ (288X−2160) dX + ∫ (720X − 2160) dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o
3 3
1 1
= ∫ (36X2 −54X−2754) dX + ∫ (720X − 2160)dX , (First two integrals have been combined)
2EI o 3EI o
3 3
1 36X3 54X2 2
− 2754 X + 720X − 2160X
1
= −
2EI 3 2 o 3EI 2 o
1
× 32 − 2754 × 3 +
54 1 720 4090.5 1080
12 × 33 −
3EI 2 × 3 − 2160 × 3 − EI − EI
2
=
2EI 2
51.705
∆DH =
EI
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 79
∫ mH dX
1
δdhdh = 2
EI
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1 1
= ∫ (X + 1.5)2dX + ∫ (−X+7.5)2dX + ∫ (7.5)2dX + ∫ (7.5)2dX + ∫ X2dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EI o
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1 1
= ∫ (X2+3X+2.25)dX+ ∫ (X2−15X+56.25)dX+ ∫ 56.25 dX+ ∫ 56.25 dX+ ∫ X2 dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EI o
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 X3 3X2 1 X3 15X2 1 X3
+ 2.25X + +56.25X + 56.25X | +
1 1
= + − 56.25X | +
2EI 3 2 o 2EI 3 2 o 3EI o 3EI o EI 3 o
3 3
1 3 3 2 1 7.53
× ×3 +2.25×3 + − ×32+56.25×3+
1 3 15 1 1
= (56.25×3) + (56.25×6) +
2EI 3 2 2EI 3 2 3EI 3EI 3EI 3
14.625 55.125 56.25 112.5 140.625
= + + + +
EI EI EI EI EI
379.125
δdhdh = +
EI
∫ (mH × mθ) dX
1
αdhdθ =
EI
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1 1
αdhdθ = ∫ (X+1.5)(−1)dX+ ∫ (−X+7.5)(−1)dX+ ∫ (7.5)(−1)dX+ ∫ (7.5)(−1)dX+ ∫ (X)(−1)dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EIo
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1 1
= ∫ (−X−1.5)dX + ∫ (X−7.5)dX + ∫ (−7.5)dX + ∫ (−7.5)dX + ∫ (−X)
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EI o
3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1
= ∫ (−9)dX + ∫ (−7.5)dX + ∫ (−7.5)dX + ∫ (−X)dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o EI o
3 3 6 7.5
1 X2
−7.5X | + -
1 1 1
= −9X | + −7.5X | +
2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EI 2 o
1 (7.5)2
(−7.5 × 6) + −
1 1 1
= (−9 × 3) + (−7.5 × 3) +
2EI 3EI 3EI EI 2
64.125
αdhdθ = −
EI
∫ (M × mv) dX
1
∆Dv =
EI
3 3 3
1 1 1
∆Dv = ∫ (36X − 396 )(−9 ) dX + ∫ (−288 )(−9 ) dX + ∫ (96X − 288) (X−9)dX + 0 + 0
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o
80 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
3 3 3
1 1 1
= ∫ (−324X+3564) dX + ∫ 2592 dX + ∫ (96X2−864X −288X + 2592) dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o
3 3
1 1
= ∫ (−324X + 6156) dX + ∫ (96X2 − 1152X + 2592) dX
2EI o 3EI o
1 −324X2
3 3
+ 6156X +
1 96X3 1152X2
=
2EI 2 o 3EI 3 − 2 + 2592Xo
1 1
= (−162 × 32 + 6156 × 3) + (32 × 33 − 576 × 32 + 2592 × 3)
2EI 3EI
8505 1152
= +
EI EI
9657
∆Dv =
EI
∫ (mv) dX
1
δdvdv = 2
EI
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1 1
= ∫ (−9 )2 dX + ∫ (−9 )2 dX + ∫ (X−9 )2 dX + ∫ (−X)2 dX + ∫ ( 0 ) dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EI o
3 3 6
1 1 1
= ∫ 162 dX + ∫ (X2 −18X + 81) dX + ∫ X2 dX
2EI o 3EI o 3EI o
3 3 6
1 X2 18X2 1 X3
+ 81X +
162
= X | + −
2EI o 3EI 3 2 o 3EI 3 o
1 33 1 63
− 9 × 32 + 81 × 3 +
81(3)
= +
EI 3EI 3 3EI 3
324
δdvdv = +
EI
∫ (mv × mθ) dX
1
αdvdθ =
EI
3 3 3 6
1 1 1 1
αdvdθ = ∫ 9 dX + ∫ 9 dX + ∫ (−X + 9) dX + ∫ × dX + 0
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o
3 3 2 3 2 6
=
1
9X | +
1
9X | +
1 −X + 9X| + 1 X
2EI o 2EI o 3EI 2 o 3EI 2 o
1 −9
+ 9 × 3 +
1 1 1 36
= (9 × 3) + (9 × 3) +
2EI 2EI 3EI 2 3EI 2
40.5
αdvdθ = +
EI
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 81
∫ (mθ ) dX
1
αdθdθ = 2
EI
3 3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1 1
αdθdθ = ∫ 1dX + ∫ 1dX + ∫ 1dX + ∫ 1dX + ∫ 1dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EI o
3 3 6 7.5
1 1 1 1
= X| + X| + X| + X|
2EI o 3EI o 3EI o EI o
1 1 1 1
= (3) + (3) + (6) + (7.5)
EI 3EI 3EI EI
13.5
αdθdθ = +
EI
∫ (M x mθ) dX
1
θD =
EI
3 3 3
1 1 1
= ∫ (−36X +396) dX + ∫ 288 dX + ∫ (−96X + 288) dX
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o
3 3
1 1
= ∫ (−36X + 684) dX + ∫ (−96X + 288) dX
2EI o 3EI o
3 3
1 X2 X2
+ 684X +
1
= −36 −96 + 288X
2EI 2 o 3EI 2 o
1 1
= (−18 × 9 + 684 × 3) + (− 48 × 9 + 288 × 3)
2EI 3EI
1089
θD = +
EI
∫ (m
1
δdhdv = H × mv ) dX
EI
3 3 3 6
1 1 1 1
δdhdv = ∫ (−9X − 13.5)dX + ∫ (+9X − 67.5)dX + ∫ (7.5x − 67.5)dX + ∫ (−7.5X) dX +0
2EI o 2EI o 3EI o 3EI o
3 3 6
1 1 1
= ∫ (− 81)dX + ∫ (7.5X − 67.5) dx + ∫ (− 7.5X) dX
2EI o 3EI o 3EI o
82 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
3 3 6
1 7.5X2 1 7.5X2
− 67.5X| +
1
−81X | +
=
2EI o 3EI 2 o 3EI − 2 o
1 7.5 1 −7.5
× 9 − 67.5 × 3 +
1
(−81 × 3) +
=
2EI 3EI 2 3EI − 2 × 36
222.75
δdhdv = −
EI
Multiply (5) by 64.125 & (6) by 222.75 & subtract (6) from (5) to eliminate HD again
619255.125 − 14283.84 HD + 20776.5 VD + 2597.06 MD = 0
− 242574.75 − 14283.84 HD + 9021.375 VD + 3007.125 MD= 0
376680.375 + 11755.125 VD − 410.065 MD = 0 → (8)
Now equation (7) and (8) are in terms of VD and MD
− 26210.83 − 581.965 MD = 0
379.125 HD + 5205.44 = 0
HD = − 13.73 KN
HD = − 13.73 KN
VD = − 33.62 KN
MD = − 45.64 KN − m
These reactions are applied to frame which becomes statically determinate now and shear force and moment
diagram can be sketched (by parts) now.
96
3m 6m
B C
3I
3m 2I
36KN E
3m
I 7.5m
A HA=22.27KN
Ma=68.98Kn-m
VA =62.38KN D 45.04KN-m
13.73KN
HA = 22.27 KN
∑Fy = 0
VA + 33.62 − 96 = 0
VA = 62.38 KN
84 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∑M =0
MA + 45.04 − 13.73 × 1.5 + 33.62 × 9 − 96 × 3− 36 × 3 = 0
MA − 68.98 = 0
A 22.27Kn D 13.73Kn
68.98KN-m 45.04KN-m
62.38Kn 33.62KN
0 0 B.M.D.
43.36 57.94
Mx = −45.04 + 13.73x = 0
x = 3.28 m
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD 85
FOR COLUMN AB
(Seen rotated at 90°)
36KN
43.36KN-m
68.98KN-m 3m
A 3m B
22.27KN
13.73KN
22.27 + S.F.D.
0 0
13.73
0 0
FOR COLUMN DC
(Seen rotated at 90°)
45.04KN-m 57.94KN-m
7.5m
D C
13.73KN 13.73KN
13.73 13.73
+
0 0 S.F.D.
X=3.28m + 57.94
+
0 0 B.M.D.
45.04
Mx=-45.04+13.73x = 0
x = 3.28m
143.78 62.38
+ 13.73
57.94
43.36 13.73 33.62
43.36 57.94
+ S.F.D.
2.17
B.M.D. + +
22.27
68.98 13.73
Composite S.F.D. for analysed frame
45.04 Fig. 2.48
86 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Elastic Curve:-
140m
B.D.S. Under applied loads.
Fig. 2.56a
1
B C D E
A
bb x Vb cb x Vb dbxVb
D
A B C D E
bc x Vc cc x Vc dc x Vc
1
A B C D E
bd x Vd cd x Vd dd xVd
M
Sketch BDS, Draw SFD, and diagram for use in conjugate beam method.
EI
65 m
10KN 5KN
15m C
B D E
A
Fig. 2.57
10x 125 5x60
RA = x
140 140
80m 60m 3.93KN = RE
140m
= 11.07KN
11.07
+ 1.07 S.F.D.
0 1.07 0
+
3.93
235.8/EI
166.05/EI M/EI diagram over
A3
conjugate beam
A1 A2 A4
A E
B C D
11631.161/E1 9748.339/E1
M
Splitting above in 4 parts as shown, calculate areas of these portions.
EI
1 166.05 1245.375
A1 = × 15 × =
2 EI EI
166.05 10793.25
A2 = × 65 =
EI EI
88 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1 69.75 2266.875
A3 = × × 65 =
2 EI EI
1 7074
A4 = × 235.8 × 60 =
2 EI
21379.5
A1+A2+A3+A4 =
EI
∑ M′E =0
1
1245.375 125+ +10793.25 60+ +2266.875 60+ +7074 ×60
15 65 65 2
RA′ x 140 =
EI 3 2 3 3
11631.161
RA′ =
EI
21379.5 11631.161
RE′ = −
EI EI
9748.339
RE′ =
EI
M
Isolating the upper part of diagram between two loads.
EI
235.8
C
15 B
y1YYy2
166.05/EI
55
65
y2 235.8
= By conjugate beam method, ∆B would be moment at B' of conjugate beam
55 65
M
loaded with diagram.
EI
y2 = 199.52
y1 = 54.4
1
11631.161×30−1245.375 15+ − (166.05×15) × 7.5 − 54.42× ×
15 15 15
∆B =
EI 3 2 3
303080.955
= KN−m3
EI
235.8
D 30
y3 = 117.9/EI
Y y3
60m
M
Isolating the portion of diagram between right support and 5 KN load.
EI
Moment at D' of conjugate beam
1
9748.339 × 30 − × 117.9 × 30 ×
1 30
∆D =
EI 2 3
274765.17
∆D = KN−m3
EI
M
If we construct diagram for above figures 2.56b, 2.56c and 2.56d and place them over conjugate beam,
EI
we have δcb= 34501.88, δcc= 57166.66, δcd= 34501.88 on similar lines as above. From conjugate beam
for fig: 2.56b, you will have
1
982.086 × 30 − (353.565) =
30 25926.93
δbb =
EI
30 EI
1
667.884 × 70 − × 15 × 70 =
1 70 34501.88
δcb =
EI 2 3 EI
1
667.884 × 30 − × 6.423 × 30 =
1 30 19073.07
δdb =
EI 2 3 EI
We already know from law of reciprocal deflections that
δcb = δbc
δbd = δdb
δcd = δdc
From conjugate beam for fig: 2.5d, you will have
15 × 70 70 34501.88
= 667.884 × 70 −
1
δcd
EI 2 3 = EI
1
982.086 × 30 − × 23.571 × 30 =
1 30 25926.93
δdd =
EI 2 EI EI
Vd = − 14.30 KN
Vc = 12.98 KN
Vb = 18.44 KN
90 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Now the continuous beam has become determinate. Apply loads and redundants reactions, other
support reactions can be determined.
10KN 5KN
15m 10m
A B C D E
∑ME = 0
Va × 140 − 10 × 125 − 18.44 × 110 − 12.98 × 70 − 5 × 60 + 14.3 × 30 = 0
Va = 28.9 KN
∑ Fy = 0
gives Ve = 3.22 KN upwards
Now shear force and BMD can be plotted as the beam is statically determinate now.
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 91
CHAPTER TWO
NOTE:−
Special care must be exercised while partially differentiating the strain energy expressions and
compatibility requirements of the chosen basic determinate structure should also be kept in mind.
For the convenience of readers, Castigliano’s theorem are given below:
wKN/m
Ma x
A B
L
Ra Rb
Number of reactions = 3
n
Number of equations = 2
WwKN/m
Ma
x
A B
Ra Rb
L
Therefore, partially differentiating the strain energy stored w.r.t. redundant, the generalized form is:
L
∂U ∂M
∫ M dX
1
= Where R is a typical redundant.
∂R EI o ∂R
Putting moment expression alongwith its limits of validity in strain energy expression.
L
wX22
∫ RbX −
1
U = dX
2EI o 2
Partially differentiate strain energy U w.r.t. redundant Rb, and set equal to zero.
L
∂U wX2
= ∆b = 0 = ∫ RbX −
1
So (X) dX, because at B, there should be no deflection.
∂Rb EI o 2
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 93
L
1 wX3
0= ∫ RbX2 − dX
EI o 2
L
1 RbX3 wX4
0= −
EI 3 8 o
RbL3 wL4
Or =
3 8
and
+3
Rb = wL
8
The (+ve) sign with Rb indicates that the assumed direction of redundant Rb is correct. Now calculate Ra.
∑ Fy = 0
Ra + Rb = wL
Ra = wL − Rb
3
= wL − wL
8
8 wL − 3 wL
=
8
5
Ra = wL
8
3
Put X = L and Rb = wL in moment expression for MX already established before to get Ma.
8
3 wL2
Ma = wL .L −
8 2
3 wL2
= wL2 −
8 2
3 wL2 − 4 wL2
=
8
wL2
Ma = −
8
The (−ve) sign with Ma indicates that this reactive moment should be applied such that it gives us tension
at the top at point A.
94 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Example No.2: Solve the following propped cantilever loaded at its centre as shown by method of least
work.
Ma x
P x
A B
C
Ra L Rb
Ma x
P x
A B
C
Ra L Rb
L/2
L
Mbc = RbX 0 < X <
2
= RbX − P x −
L L
and Mac < X < L. Now write strain energy expression.
2 2
L/2 L 2
∫ RbX − PX − dX. Partially differentiate
1 1 L
U = ∫ (RbX)2 dX +
2EI o 2EI L/2 2
w.r.t redundant Rb.
L/2 L
∂U
∫ Rbx − PX − [X] dX
1 1 L
= ∆b = 0 = ∫ [RbX] [X] dX +
∂Rb EI o EI L/2 2
L/2 L
∫ RbX2 dX + ∫ RbX2 − PX2 + P X dX
1 1 L
0 =
EI o EI L/2 2
L/2 L
1 X3 1 RbX3 PX3 PL 2
0 = Rb. + − + X
EI 3 o EI 3 3 4 L/2. Put limits
RbL3 5PL3
0 = −
3 48
RbL3 5PL3
Or =
3 48
+5P
Rb =
16
The (+ve) sign with Rb indicates that the assumed direction of redundant Rb is correct. Now Ra
can be calculated.
∑ Fy = 0
Ra + Rb = P
Ra = P − Rb
5P 16P − 5P
Ra = P − =
16 16
11P
Ra =
16
5P
Put X = L and Rb = in expression for Mac to get Ma.
16
5P L
Ma = L − P
16 2
5 PL − 8 PL
=
16
− 3 PL
Ma =
16
The (−ve) sign with Ma indicates that this reactive moment should be acting such that it gives us
tension at the top.
L
Ra Rb
Ra L Rb
wX2
Mx = RbX − − Mb 0<X<L Choosing B as origin.
2
Write strain energy expression.
L 2
1 wX2
U = ∫ RbX − − Mb dX
2EI o 2
Differentiate strain energy partially w.r.t. redundant Rb and use castigations
theorem alongwith boundary condition.
L
∂U 1 wX2
= ∆b = 0 = ∫ RbX − − Mb [X] dX
∂Rb EI o 2
L
1 wX2
0 = ∫ RbX − − Mb dX
EI o 2
L
1 X3 wX4 MbX2
0 = Rb − −
EI 3 8 2 o
1 L3 wL4 MbL2
0 = Rb − −
EI 3 8 2
L3 wL4 MbL2
0 = Rb − − → (1)
3 8 2
As there are two redundants, so we require two equations. Now differentiate strain energy
expression w.r.t. another redundants Mb. Use castigations theorem and boundary condition.
L
∂U 1 2
RbX − wX − Mb ( −1) dX
= θb = 0 = ∫
∂Mb EI o 2
L
1 wX2
0 = ∫ − RbX + + Mb dX
EI o 2
L
1 RbX2 wX3
0 = − + + MbX
EI 2 6 o
Rb L2 wL3
0 = − + + MbL.
2 6
Rb L2 wL3
− = MbL
2 6
RbL wL2
So Mb = − → (2) Put Mb in equation 1, we get
2 6
RbL3 wL4
0 = −
12 24
wL
Rb =
2
Put Rb value in equation 2, we have
wL2
Mb =
wL L
−
2 2 6
+wL2
Mb =
12
The (+ve) value with Rb and Mb indicates that the assumed directions of these two redundants
are correct. Now find other reactions Ra and Mb by using equations of static equilibrium.
∑ Fy = 0
Ra + Rb = wL
Ra = wL − Rb
wL
= wL −
2
wL
Ra =
2
wL wL2
Put X = L , Rb = & Mb = in MX expression to get Ma
2 12
wL wL2 wL2
Ma = .L− −
2 2 12
wL2
Ma = −
12
The (−ve) sign with Ma indicates that this moment should be applied in such direction that it
gives us tension at the top.
Example No. 4: Solve the same previous fixed ended beam by taking a simple beam as B.D.S.:−
Choosing Ma and Mb as redundants.
Ma WwKN/m
x Mb
A B
Ra L Rb
BDS UNDER LOADS AND REDUNDANTS
B.D.S. is a simply supported beam , So Ma and Mb are redundants.
98 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∑ Ma = 0
wL2
Rb × L + Ma = Mb +
2
wL2
Rb × L = (Mb − Ma ) +
2
−
Rb =
Mb Ma wL
L + 2 So taking B as origin. Write MX expression.
wX2
MX = RbX − Mb − 0<X<L
2
Put Rb value
Mb − Ma + wL X − wX − Mb
2
MX = 0 < X < L. Set up strain energy
L 2 2
expression.
L
Mb − Ma wL
2
∫
2
1 wX
+ 2 X − 2 − Mb dX. Differentiate w.r.t. Ma first.
U =
2EI o L
Use castigations theorem and
boundary conditions.
L
∂U Mb − Ma wL
= θa = 0 = ∫ − Mb − dX. In general R.H.S.
1 wX2 X
+ X−
∂Ma EI o L 2 2 L
1
is ∫ N.m.dX.
EI
L
1 MbX MaX wL wX2
− Mb − dX
X
0 = ∫ − + X−
EI o L L 2 2 L
L
1 MbX2 MaX2 wX2 wX3 MbX
0= ∫ − + − + + dX . Integrate it.
EI o L2 L2 2 2L L
L
1 Mb X2 Ma X3 wX3 wX4 MbX2
0= − + 2 − + + . Simplify it.
EI L2 3 L 3 6 8L 2L o
L
∂U Mb − Ma wL
= θb = 0 = ∫ − Mb − 1 dX
1 wX2 X
+ X−
∂Mb EI o L 2 2 L
L
1 MbX MaX wL wX2
− Mb − 1 dX
X
0 = ∫ − + X−
EI o L L 2 2 L
L
MbX2 MaX2 wLX2 wX3 MbX MbX MaX wLX wX2
0 = ∫ − + − − − + − + + MbdX
o L
2
L2 2L 2L L L L 2 2
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 99
L
MbX3 MaX3 wX3 wX4 MbX2 MbX2 MaX2 wLX2 wX3
0 =
3L2 − 3L2 + 6 − 8L − 2L − 2L + 2L − 4 + 6 + MbXo
Put limits now.
3 3 3 4 2 2 2 2 3
0= MbL2 − MaL2 + wL − wL − MbL − MbL + MaL − wLL + wL + MbL
3L 3L 6 8L 2L 2L 2L 4 6
Simplifying we get.
wL2 Ma
so Mb = − (2), Put Mb in equation (1) we get.
8 2
wL2
Ma =
12
Put Ma in equation (2) , we have
wL2 wL2 1
Mb = − ×
8 12 2
W W
A C
B
L/2 L/2
EI=Constant
x
Ma W W
x
A C
B
Ra Rb Rc
L/2 L/2
BDS UNDER LOADS AND REDUNDANTS
L wX2
Mab = Rc.X + Rb X −
L
− < X < L . Write strain energy expression for entire
2 2 2
structure.
L/2 2 2 L 2
wX2
∫ Rc.X −
wX
∫ Rc.X + Rb X − −
1 1 L
U= dX + dX
2EI o 2 2EI L/2 2 2
Partially differentiate it w.r.t. redundant Rc first. Use castiglianos theorem and boundary
conditions.
L/2 L
∂U 1 2
Rc.X − wX [X]dX + 1 ∫ Rc.X + Rb X − L − wX [X] dX
2
= ∆c = 0 = ∫
∂Rc EI o 2 EI L/2 2 2
L/2 3 L 3
0=
1
∫ Rc.X2 − wX dX + 1 ∫ Rc.X2 + Rb.X2 − Rb.LX − wX dX . Integrate it.
EI o 2 EI L/2 2 2
L/2 L
1 X3 wX 4 X3 X3 RbLX2 wX 4
+ Rc.
1
0= Rc. − + Rb. − .− . Insert limits and
EI 3 8 o EI 3 3 4 8 L/2
simplify.
Now partially differentiate strain energy w.r.t. Rb. Use Castiglianos theorem and boundary conditions.
L/2 L
∂U wX2 wX2
= ∆b = 0 = ∫ Rc.X − (0) dX + ∫ Rc.X + Rb X − − X − dX
1 1 L L
∂Rb EI o 2 EI L/2 2 2 2
L
RbLX wX3 Rc.L.X RbL.X Rb.L2 wL.X2
∫ Rc.X2 + RbX2 −
1
0 = 0+ − − − + + dX.
EI L/2 2 2 2 2 4 4
Integrate.
L
1 Rc.X3 Rb.X3 Rb.L.X2 wX4 Rc.L.X2 Rb.LX2 Rb.L2.X wL.X3
0 = + − − − − + + .
EI 3 3 4 8 4 4 4 12 L/2
Put limits
Rc.L3 Rb.L3 Rb.L3 wL4 Rc.L3 Rb.L3 Rb.L3 wL4 Rc.L3 Rb.L3
0 = + − − − − + + − −
3 3 4 8 4 4 4 12 24 24
Simplify to get
2 17
Rc. = − Rb. + wL → (2) Put this value of Rc in equation ( 1), to get Rb
5 40
L3 5 wL4
0 = − wL +
2 17
Rb. + Rb.L3 − (1)
5 40 3 48 8
2 17 5 wL4
0 = − Rb.L3 + wL4 + Rb.L3 −
15 120 48 8
Simplify to get
12
Rb. = wL
21
2 12 17
Rc = − × wL + wL
5 21 40
11
Rc = wL
56
The (+ve) signs with Rb & Rc indicate that the assumed directions of these two redundants are correct.
Now calculate Ra.
∑ Fy = 0
Ra + Rb + Rc = wL
12 11 wL
= wL − wL −
21 56
373
Ra = wL
1176
91
Ra = wL
392
Putting the values of these reactions in Mx expression for span AB and set X = L, we have
L wL2
Ma = Rc.L + Rb. − . Put values of Rb and Rc from above and simplify.
2 2
11 wL 12 L wL2
= .L + wL × −
56 21 2 2
21
Ma = − wL2
1176
7
Ma = − wL2
392
The (−ve) sign with Ma indicates that this reactive moment should be applied in such a direction that gives
us tension at the top. Now the beam has been analyzed and it is statically determinate now.
2.7. INTERNAL INDETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES BY FORCE METHOD :−
The question of internal indeterminacy relates to the skeletal structures like trusses which have discrete line
members connected at the ends. The structures which fall in this category may include trusses and skeletal
frames.
For fixed ended portal frames, the question of internal indeterminacy is of theoretical interest only.
1 2
Relative displacement
of horizontal number =
Consider he truss shown in the above diagram. If this truss is to be treated as internally indeterminate, more
than one members can be considered as redundants. However, the following points should be considered
for deciding the redundant members.
(1) The member which is chosen the redundant member is usually assumed to be removed or cut. The
selection of redundant should be such that it should not effect the stability of the remaining
structure.
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 103
(2) The skeletal redundant members will have unequal elongations at the two ends and in the direction
in which the member is located. For example, if a horizontal member is chosen as redundant, then
we will be concerned with the relative displacement of that member in the horizontal direction
only.
(3) Unequal nodal deflection (∆1 − ∆2 ) of a typical member shown above which is often termed as
relative displacement is responsible for the self elongation of the member and hence the internal
force in that member.
B2
Together
B1
Apart
B C
A D
Due to the applied loads, the distance between the points B and D will increase. Let us assume that point B
is displaced to its position B2. This displacement is termed as ∆ apart. Now the same structure is considered
under the action of redundant force only and let us assume that point B2 comes to its position B1 (some of
the deflections have been recovered). This displacement is termed as ∆ together. The difference of these
two displacements ( ∆apart − ∆together) is infact the self lengthening of the member BD and the
compatibility equation is
∆apart − ∆together = self elongation.
A D A D
F-Diagram U-Diagram
104 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
n 2
Total Deflection produced by redundants ∆ × R = ∑ UiLi × X
i=1 AiEi
n
FiUiLi
Total Deflection produced by loads ∆×L = ∑
i = 1 AiEi
If deflection is (+ve), there is elongation. If deflection is (−ve), there is shortening.
P2L
Now U = Elastic strain energy stored due to axial forces
2AE
P
L AE
P
PROOF:−
Work done = 1/2 P.∆ = shaded area of P − ∆ diagram.
Now f α ∈ (Hooke’s Law)
P ∆
or α (For direct stresses)
A L
P ∆
= E where E is Yung’s Modulus of elasticity.
A L
PL
∆ =
AE
P∆ 1 PL
Therefore work done = = P. ( Shaded area under P−∆ line __ By putting value of ∆)
2 2 AE
P2L
Work done = (for single member)
2AE
P2L
Work done = ∑ (for several members)
2AE
EXAMPLE NO 6:
Analyze the truss shown below by Method of Least work. Take
(1) Member U1L2 as redundant.
(2) Member U1U2 as redundant. Number in brackets ( ) are
areas × 10−3 m2. E = 200 × 106 KN/m2
U1 (24) U2
L0U1 = 7.5m
Cos = 0.8 (1.8)
Sin = 0.6 (3.0) (3.0)
6m
(1.2) (1.8)
L0 L3
(2.4) L1 (2.4) L2 (2.4)
3 @ 4,5m
48KN
Note: In case of internally redundant trusses, Unit load method (a special case of strain energy method)
is preferred over direct strain energy computations followed by their partial differentiation.
SOLUTION: Case 1 – Member U1L2 as redundant
L0 U1=7.5m U1 U2
Cos = 0.8
Sin = 0.6
3.0 3.0
6m
1.2 1.8 1.2
L0 2.0 L3
2.4 L1 2.4 L2
3@4.5m
48KN
F-Diagram
F′UL U2L
Condition: ∆ apart = ∑81 ∆ together= ∑81 × PU1 L2
AE AE
U1 2.4 U2
1.8
3.0 1.2 1.2 3.0 6m
L0 2.4 L
L1 L2 3
3@4.5m
48
/
(BDS under loads) F - diagram
16
+
0 0
SFD
32
144
72
+
0 0 B.M.D.
+
We shall determine member forces for F/ - diagram by method of moments and shears as
explained earlier. These are shown in table given in pages to follow. Member forces in U-diagram are
determined by the method of joints.
U1 0.60 U2
.0
+1
1
1 Cos
L
o L3
O L1 L2 o
Sin
(BDS under) U-diagram redundant unit force.
JOINT (L2)
1 U2 L 2
L1 L2
∑FX = 0
1 × Sinθ + L1L2 = 0
L1L2 = − Sinθ = − 0.60
∑ Fy = 0
U2L2 + 1 × Cosθ = 0
U2L2 = − Cosθ = − 0.80
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 107
Joint (L1)
U1 L1
L1U2
L1L 2
0.6
∑ FX =0
0.6
L1U2 = =+1
0.6
∑ Fy = 0
Now Book F/ forces induced in members as determined by moments and shears method and U
forces as determined by method of joints in a tabular form.
Compatibility equation is
∆×L+∆×R=0
n
F′UL
∆×L=∑
1 AE
n
U2L
∆×R=∑ .X Putting values from above table in compatibility equation. Where R = X = force
1 AE
in redundant Member U1L2
108 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Now final member forces will be obtained by formula Fi = Fi' + Ui X. These are also given in above table.
Apply check on calculated forces.
Check on forces
Joint Lo
20
12
16
Note: Tensile forces in above table carry positive sign and are represented as acting away from joint.
Compressive forces carry negative sign and are represented in diagram as acting towards the joint.
∑ Fx = 0
12 − 20 Sin θ = 0
12 − 20 × 0.6 = 0
0 = 0
∑ Fy = 0
16 − 20 Cos θ = 0
16 − 20 × 0.8 = 0
0 =0 Checks have been satisfied showing correctness of solution.
EXMAPLE NO. 7:
CASE 2: Analyze previous loaded Truss by taking U1 U2 as Redundant
U1 U2
Cos = 0.8
40 Sin = 0.6
F/ =Diagram
20 40
32 20 64
L0 L3
L1 36 L2 24
16 48 32
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 109
In this case member forces in BDS (F/ diagram) have been computed by method of joints due to
obvious reasons.)
Joint Lo:-
LoU1
LoL1
16
∑ Fy = 0
16 + LoU1 × Cosθ = 0
16
LoU1 = − = − 20
0.8
∑ FX = 0
LoL1 + LoU1 Sinθ = 0
LoL1 + LoU1 × 0.6 = 0
LoL1 − 20 × 0.6 = 0
LoL1 = + 12
Joint U1
20
U1 L1
U1 L2
∑ FX = 0
20 Sinθ+ U1L2 Sinθ = 0
20 × 0.6 + U1L2 × 0.6 = 0
U1L2 = − 20
∑ Fy = 0
20 × 0.8 − U1L1 − U1L2 × 0.8 = 0
20 × 0.8 − U1L1 + 20 × 0.8 = 0
U1L1 = 32
Joint L1:
32
L1 U2
12
L1 L2
∑ Fy = 0
L1U2 Cosθ + 32 = 0
110 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
32
L1U2 = −
0.8
L1U2 = − 40
∑ FX = 0
L1L2 + L1U2 Sinθ − 12 = 0
L1L2 − 40 × 0.6 − 12 = 0
L1L2 = 36
Joint U2
U2 L3
40 U2 L2
∑ FX = 0
40 Sinθ + U2L3 Sinθ = 0
40 × 0.6 + U2L3 × 0.6 = 0
U2L3 = − 40
∑ Fy = 0
40 Cosθ − U2L3 Cosθ − U2L2 = 0
40 × 0.8 − ( − 40) × 0.8 − U2L2 = 0
U2L2 = 64
Joint L2
20 64
36 L2 L3
48
∑ FX = 0
L2L3 + 20 Sinθ − 36 = 0
L2L3 + 20 × 0.6 − 36 = 0
L2L3 − 24 = 0
L2L3 = 24
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 111
Joint L3 (Checks)
40
24
32
∑ FX = 0
40 Sinθ − 24 = 0
40 × 0.6 − 24 = 0
0 = 0
∑ Fy = 0
32 − 40 Cosθ = 0
32 − 40 × 0.8 = 0
0 = 0 Checks are satisfied. Results are OK and are given in table at page to follow:
Now determine member forces in U diagram.
U1 1 1 U2
1.66
0 1.328 1.328 0
1.66
L0
L3
0 L1 1 L2 0
U-Diagram
(BDS under unit redundant force)
Joint U1
U1 L2
U1 L1
∑ FX = 0
1 + U1L2 × Sinθ = 0
1 + U1L2 × 0.6 = 0
112 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
U1L2 = − 1.66
∑ Fy = 0
U1L1 +U1L2 × Cosθ = 0
U1L1 + ( − 1.66) × 0.8 = 0
U1L1 = 1.328
Joint L1 :-
1.328 L1 U2
L1 L2
∑ Fy = 0
1.328 + L1U2 × 0.8 = 0
1.328
L1U2 = − = − 1.66
0.8
∑ FX = 0
L1L2 = +1
Entering results of member forces pertaining to F/ diagram and U diagram alongwith member
properties in a tabular form.
Compatibility equation is
∆ × L + ∆ × R = 0 Putting values of ∆ × L and ∆ × R due to redundant from above table.
56 × 10-3 + 221.73 × 10-6 X = 0 , where X is force in redundant member U1U2.
5.6 × 10-3
X =
0.22173 × 10-3
12
16
∑ FX = 0
12 − 20 Sinθ = 0
12 − 20 × 0.6 = 0
0=0
∑ Fy = 0
16 − 20 Cosθ = 0
16 − 20 × 0.8 = 0
16 − 16 = 0
0=0 Results are OK.
114 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
(1) Consider the given truss under the action of applied loads and redundant force X
in member U1L2
(2) The forces in the relevant rectangle will be a function of applied load and
redundant force X. (As was seen in previous unit load method solution)
(3) Formulate the total strain energy expression due to direct forces for all the
members in the truss.
(5) Sum up these expressions and set equal to zero. Solve for X.
(6) With this value of X, find the member forces due to applied loads and redundant acting
simultaneously (by applying the principle of super positions).
EXAMPLE NO. 8 :-
Analyze the loaded truss shown below by least work by treating member U1L2 as redundant.
Numbers in ( ) are areas × 10-3 m2 . E = 200 × 106 KN/m2.
SOLUTION:-
48 x 4.5 48
= 16KN 32
b = 10
r =3
j =6
b+r =2j
10 + 3 = 2 × 6
13 = 12
D = 13 − 12 = 1
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 115
16
48
32
NOTE: Only the rectangle of members containing redundant X contains forces in terms of X as has been
seen earlier. Now analyze the Truss by method of joints to get Fi forces.
JOINT L0
L0U1
L0L1
16KN
∑ Fy = 0
LoU1 Cosθ + 16 = 0
− 16
LoU1 =
Cosθ
− 16
=
0.8
LoU1 = − 20 KN
∑ FX = 0
LoL1 + LoU1 Sinθ = 0
LoL1 + (−20) × 0.6 = 0
LoL1 − 12 = 0
LoL1 = 12 KN
Joint U1
U1 U2
20
U1L1 X
∑ FX = 0
U1 U2 + X Sinθ + 20 Sinθ = 0
116 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
U1 U2 + X × 0.6 + 20 × 0.6 = 0
U1 U2 = − (0.6 X +12)
∑ Fy = 0
− U1 L1 − X Cosθ + 20 Cosθ = 0
− U1 L1 − X × 0.8 + 20 × 0.8 = 0
U1 L1 = − 0.8 X + 16
U1L1 = − (0.8 X − 16)
Joint L1 :-
0.8X - 16
L1U
2
12 L1 L2
∑ Fy = 0
− (0.8X − 16) + L1 U2 Cosθ = 0
L1U2 × 0.8 = 0.8 X − 16
L1U2 = (X − 20)
∑ FX = 0
L1L2 + L1U2 Sinθ − 12 = 0 Put value of L1U2.
L1L2 + (X − 20 ) × 0.6 − 12 = 0
L1L2 + 0.6 X − 12 − 12 = 0
L1 L2 = − (0.6X − 24)
Joint U2
(0.6X+12)
(X-20) U2 L3
U2 L2
∑ FX = 0
(0.6 X + 12) + U2L3 Sinθ − (X − 20) Sinθ = 0
0.6 X + 12 + U2L3 × 0.6 − (X − 20) × 0.6 = 0
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 117
U2L3 = − 40 KN
∑ Fy = 0
− U2L2 − (X − 20) Cosθ − U2L3 Cosθ = 0
− U2L2 − (X − 20) × 0.8 − (− 40) × 0.8 = 0
− U2L2 − 0.8 X + 16 + 32 = 0
− 0.8 X + 48 = U2L2
0.8 X - 48
X
L2 L3
0.6 X -24
48
∑ FX = 0
L2L3 + 0.6 X − 24 − X Sinθ = 0
L2L3 = − 0.6 X + 24 + 0.6 X
L2L3 = 24 KN
∑ Fy = 0
− (0.8X − 48) − 48 + X Cosθ = 0
− 0.8X + 48 − 48 + 0.8X = 0
0 = 0 (Check)
Joint L3 :-
At this joint, all forces have already been calculated. Apply checks for corretness.
40
24
32
118 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∑ FX = 0
40 Sinθ − 24 = 0
40 × 0.6 − 24 = 0
24 − 24 = 0
0 =0 O.K.
∑ Fy = 0
− 40 Cosθ + 32 = 0
− 40 × 0.8 + 32 = 0
− 32 + 32 = 0 O.K. Checks have been satisfied.
0 =0
This means forces have been calculated correctly. We know that strain energy stored in entire
Fi2L
Truss is U = ∑
2AE
∂Fi
∑ Fi . Li
∂U ∂X
So, = ∆ = 0 =
∂X AE
∂Fi
∑ Fi . Li
∂X
= 0 = 80.41 × 10−6X − 1764.17 × 10−6 Values of Fi and Li for various
AE
members have been picked up from table annexed.
0 = 80.41 X − 1764.17
or 80.41 X = 1764.17
1764.17
X=
80.41
X = 21.94 KN
Now putting this value of X in column S of annexed table will give us member forces.
Now apply equilibrium check on member forces calculated. You may select any Joint say L1.
Joint L1 :-
15.5
1.74
12 10.84
∑ FX = 0,
10.84 − 12 + 1.94 Sinθ = 0
or 10.84 − 12 + 1.94 × 0.6 = 0 ,
or 0 = 0 (Check) It means that solution is correct.
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 119
EXAMPLE NO. 9:- By the force method analyze the truss shown in fig. below. By using the forces in
members L1U2 and L2U3 as the redundants. Check the solution by using two different members as the redundants.
E = 200 × 10 6 KN/m2
SOLUTION:-
L0U1 = 7.5m U1 (1.8) U2 (1.8) U3
Cos = 0.8 (1.2)
Sin = 0.6 (2.4) 0 0 (1.2)
6m
(0.90) (1.2) (1.2) (0.60) (0.90)
L0 (1.5) (1.5) (1.5) (1.5) L4
L1 L2 L3 48x4.5 + 96x9
48KN 96KN 72KN 18 18
48+96+72- 4@4.5m + 72x13.5 = 114KN
114 = 102KN
F - Diagram 18
4@4.5m
+
102KN 54KN
S.F.D.
0 0
42KN
-
114KN
459 KN-m 702KN-m
513KN-m
+ B.M.D.
0 0
0.6 0
L0 0 L1 0 L2 0.6 L3 0 L4
Compatibility equations are:
∆X1L + ∆X1R1 + ∆X1R2 = 0 → (1) Change in length in member 1 due
to loads and two redundants should be zero.
∆X2L + ∆X2R1 + ∆X2R2 = 0 → (2) Change in length in member 2 due to loads
and two redundants should be zero.
Here R1 = X1
R2 = X2
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 121
∑.F′U1 L
Where ∆X1L = = Deflection produced in member (1) due to applied loads.
AE
U12L
∆X1R1 = Deflection produced in member (1) due to redundant R1 = ∑
AE . X1
∆x1R2 = Deflection produced in member (1) due to redundant R2 = ∑
U1U2L
AE . X2
F′U2L
∆x2L = Deflection produced in member (2) due to loads = ∑
AE
∆x2R1 = Deflection produced in member (2) due to redundant R1 = ∑
U1U2L
AE . X1
U22L
∆x2R2 = Deflection produced in member (2) due to redundant R 2 = ∑
AE . X2
From table attached, the above evaluated summations are picked up and final member forces can be seen
in the same table. All member forces due to applied loads (Fi' diagram) have been determined by the
method of moments and shears and by method of joints for U1 and U2 diagrams.
Evaluation of member forces in verticals of F′ − Diagram :-
Forces in verticals are determined from mothod of joints for different trusses shown above.
(Joint L1)
U1 L1
76.5 76.5
48
∑ Fy = 0
U1L1 − 48 = 0
U1L1 = 48
(Joint U2)
117 85.5
52.5
U2 L2
∑ Fy = 0
− U2L2 + 52.5 Cosθ = 0
− U2L2 + 52.5 × 0.8 = 0
U2L2 = 52.5 × 0.8
U2L2 = + 42
122 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
(Joint U3)
85.5
142.5
U3 L3
∑ Fy = 0
− U3L3 + 142.5 Cosθ = 0
U3L3 = 142.5 × 0.8
U3L3 = + 114
L1 L2
∑ FX = 0
L1L2 + 1 Sin θ = 0
L1L2 = − 0.6
∑ Fy = 0
U1L1 + 1 Cos θ = 0
U1L1 = − 0.8
(Joint U1 )
U1 U2
U1 L2
0.8
∑ FX = 0
U1U2 + U1L2 Sinθ = 0
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 123
∑ Fy = 0
+ 0.8 − U1L2 Cos θ = 0
0.8 = U1L2 × 0.8
U1L2 = 1
so U1U2 + 1 × 0.6 = 0 Putting value of U1L2 in ∑ FX.
U1 U2 = − 0.6
dividing by 10−3
− 0.671+0.1257X1 + 0.032X2 = 0 → (1)
− 6.77 + 0.032X1 + 0.1256X2 = 0 → (2)
0.671 − 0.032X2
From (1), X1 = → (3)
0.1257
Put X1 in (2) & solve for X2
0.671 − 0.032X2
− 6.77 + 0.032
0.1257 + 0.1256X2 = 0
− 6.77 + 0.171 − 8.146 × 10-3X2 + 0.1256X2 = 0
− 6.599 + 0.1174X2 = 0
0.1174X2 = 6.599
X2 = 56.19 KN
After redundants have been evaluated, final member forces can be calculated by using the formula shown
in last column of table. Apply checks on these member forces.
124 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
CHECKS:-
(Joint Lo)
127.5
76.5
102
∑ FX = 0
76.5 − 127.5 Sinθ = 0
76.5 − 127.5 × 0.6 = 0
0=0
∑ Fy = 0
102 − 127.5 Cosθ = 0
102 − 127.5 × 0.8 = 0
0=0
The results are O.K. Follow same procedure if some other two members are considered redundant.
See example No. 12.
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 125
(3) 8m
(3)
(2)
6KN B (4) E
(2)
(5)
(5) 8m
(2)
A F
6m
SOLUTION:
DEGREE OF INDETERMINACY :-
D = (m + r ) − 2 j = (10 + 4 ) − 2 × 6 = 2
Therefore, the truss is internally statically indeterminate to the 2nd degree. There can be two
approaches, viz, considering two suitable members as redundants and secondly taking one member
and one reaction as redundants for which the basic determinate structure can be obtained by
cutting the diagonal CE and replacing it by a pair of forces X1 − X1 and replacing the hinge at F
by a roller support with a horizontal redundant reaction HF = X2. Applying the first approach and
treating inclineds of both storeys sloping down to right as redundants.
Consider Joint (C) and all unknown forces are assumed to be in tension to begin with , acting away from
the joint. Length AE= 10 m , cos θ = 0.6 , sin θ = 0.8
Joint (C)
20KN
3KN
SCD
X1
SBC
∑ FX = 0
Scd + 3 + X1 Cos θ = 0
Scd = − (3 + 0.6 × X1)
∑ Fy = 0
− Sbc − X1 Sin θ − 20 = 0
Sbc = − ( 20 + 0.8 X1 )
Joint (D)
20KN
(3+0.6X1)
S BD
SDE
∑ FX = 0
3 + 0.6X1 − SBD × 0.6 = 0
SBD = ( 5 + X1 )
∑ Fy = 0
− SDE − 20 − SBD Sinθ = 0
− SDE − 20 − ( 5 + X1 ) × 0.80 = 0
SDE = − ( 24 + 0.8X1 )
Joint (B)
(20+0.8X1)
(5+X1)
6KN
SBE
X2
SAB
∑ FX = 0
SBE + (5+X1) × 0.6 + X2 × 0.6 + 6 = 0
SBE = − ( 9 + 0.6 X1 + 0.6 X2)
∑ Fy = 0
128 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
9+0.6X1 + 0.6X2
SAE
SEF
∑ FX = 0
9 + 0.6 X1 + 0.6 X2 − X1 x 0.6 − SAE × 0.6 = 0
9 + 0.6 X2 = SAE × 0.6
SAE = ( 15 + X2 )
∑ Fy = 0
− SEF − 24 − 0.8 X1 + X1 × 0.8 − (15 + X2 ) × 0.8 = 0
SEF = − 24 − 0.8 X1 + 0.8 X1 − 12 − 0.8 X2 = 0
SEF = − 36 − 0.8 X2
SEF = − (36 + 0.8 X2 )
Enter Forces in table. Now applying Catiglianos’ theorem and taking values from table attached.
∂S L
∑S. . = 0 = 485.6 + 65.64X1 + 2.7X2 = 0 (1)
∂X1 AE
and
∂S L
∑ S. . = 0 = 748.3 + 2.7X1 + 62.94 X2 = 0 (2)
∂X2 AE
X1 = − 6.921 KN
485.6 − 65.64 × 6.921
From (3) X2 = −
2.7
X2 = − 11.592 KN
Now put values of X1 and X2 in 5th column of S to get final number forces SF as given in last
column of table. Apply equilibrium check to verify correctness of solution.
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 129
EQUILIBRIUM CHECKS :-
Joint (A)
6.726KN
3.408KN
HA
4KN
∑ FX = 0
3.408 Cosθ − HA − 0
HA = 2.045 KN
∑ Fy = 0
−6.726 + 4 + 3.408 Sinθ = 0
0 = 0 Check is OK.
Joint (F)
26.726KN
11.592KN
HF
36KN
∑ FX = 0
− HF + 11.592 Cosθ = 0
HF = + 6.955 KN
∑ Fy = 0
36 − 27.726 − 11.592 × Sinθ = 0
0 = 0 (check)
It means solution is correct. Now calculate vertical reactions and show forces in diagram.
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 131
20KN 20KN
3KN C 1.153
D
6.921
14.463 18.463 8m
1.921
4.426
6KN E
B
6.726 26.726 8m
11.592
HF=6.955KN
HA=2.045Kn 3.408 F
A
VA=4KN VF=+36KN
6m
ANALYZED TRUSS
∑ MA = 0
VF × 6 − 20 × 6 − 3 × 16 − 6 × 8 = 0
VF = + 36 KN
∑ Fy = 0
VA + VF = 40 KN
VA = + 4 KN
20KN 20KN
3kn
C D Fy = 0
X VA + VF = 40
8m MA = 0
Cos =0.6
VFx6 - 3x16-20x6-6x8=0
6KN X
B E VF = 36KN
Sin 0.8
=0.8 and VA = 4KN
8m
(9-HF) F HF
A
4KN 36Kn
6m
Fig. 2.51
132 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Joint (A)
SAB
S AE
(9-HF)
4
∑FX = 0
SAE Cosθ − (9 − HF) = 0
SAE × 0.6 − (9 − HF) = 0
9 − HF
SAE =
0.6
SAE = 15 − 1.67 HF
∑ Fy = 0
4 + SAB + SAE Sinθ = 0
4 + SAB + (15 − 1.670 HF ) × 0.8 = 0
4 + SAB + 12 − 1.33 HF = 0
SAB = − 16 + 1.33 HF
Joint (F)
S BF SEF
HF
36
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 133
∑ FX = 0
− HF − SBF Cosθ = 0
− HF − 0.6 SBF = 0
− HF = 0.6 SBF
SBF = − 1.67 HF
∑ Fy = 0
36 + SEF + SBF Sinθ = 0
36 + SEF − 1.67 HF × 0.8 = 0
SEF = − (36 − 1.33 HF)
Joint (E)
SDE
X
SBE
(36 - 1.33HF)
(15-1.67HF)
∑ FX = 0
− SBE − X Cosθ − (15 − 1.67 HF) Cosθ = 0
− SBE − 0.6X − ( 15 − 1.67 HF ) × 0.6 = 0
− SBE − 0.6X − 9 + HF = 0
HF − 0.6X − 9 = SBE
∑ Fy = 0
SDE +36 − 1.33 HF + X Sinθ − (15 − 1.67HF ) Sinθ = 0 by putting Sinθ = 0.08
SDE + 36 − 1.33 HF + 0.8X − 12 + 1.33 HF = 0
SDE = − 0.8X − 24
SDE = − ( 24 + 0.8X)
Joint (C)
20KN
3KN
S CD
X
SBC
134 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∑ FX = 0
SCD + 3 + X Cosθ = 0
SCD = − ( 3 + 0.6X)
∑ Fy = 0
− 20 − SBC − X Sin θ = 0
− 20 − SBC − 0.8X = 0
SBC = − ( 20 + 0.8 X )
Joint (D)
20KN
(3+0.6X)
SBD
(24+ 0.8X)
∑FX = 0
3 + 0.6X − SBD Cosθ = 0
3 + 0.6X − 0.6 SBD = 0
SBD = ( 5 + X)
∑ Fy = 0
− 20 + 24 + 0.8X − SBD Sinθ = 0
− 20 + 24 + 0.8X − ( 5 + X ) 0.8 = 0
− 20 + 24 + 0.8X − 4 − 0.8X = 0
0 = 0 (check)
Calculation of HF & X :−
From the attached table, picking up the values of summations, we have.
∂S L
∑. S. . = 0 = (−1247.03 + 175.24 HF − 4.5 × X) 10−6
∂HF AE
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 135
∂S L
and ∑. S. . = 0 = (460.6 − 4.5 HF + 65.64X) 10-6
∂X AE
From (1)
− 1247.03 + 175.24 HF
X= → (3)
4.5
Put in (2) to get HF
− 1247.03 + 175.24 HF
460.6 − 4.5 HF + 65.64
4.5 = 0
20KN 20KN
3KN 0.925
C D
1.541
14.762 18.767
6.641 8m
6KN 1.873
B E
3.392
6.759 26.759 8m
11.603
2.052Kn A F 6.948KN
4kn 36KN
6m
2.052
4
∑ FX = 0
3.397 Cosθ − 2.052 = 0
0 = 0 Check
∑ Fy = 0
− 6.759 + 4 + 3.397 × 0.8 = 0
0 = 0 Check
Joint (F)
11.603 26.759
6.948
36
∑ FX = 0
− 6.948 + 11.603 × 0.6 = 0
0 ≅ 0 Check
∑ Fy = 0
36 − 26.759 − 11.603 × 0.8 = 0
0 ≅ 0 Check
Joint (C)
20
3 0.925
14.767 6.541
∑ FX = 0
0.925 − 6.541 × 0.6 + 3 = 0
0 = 0 Check
∑ Fy = 0
14.767 − 20 + 6.541 × 0.8 = 0
0 = 0 Check. This verifies correctness of solution.
138 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Note: The same truss has already been solved in Example No. 9, by taking L1 U2 and L2 U3 as
redundants.
E = 200 × 106 KN/m2
SOLUTION:-
U1 (1.8) U2 (1.8) U3
LoU1 = 7.5 m
Cos = 0.8
(2.4) (1.2) (1.2) (0.90)(2.4) 6m
Sin = 0.6 0.90 (1.2) F-Diagram
(1.2)
L0 (1.5) (1.5) (1.5) (1.5) L4
L1 L2 L3
U1 U2 U3
B.D.S. Under applied
load only.
Or F/-Diagram
L0 L4
L1 L2 L3
48KN 96KN 72KN
102KN 114KN
102
54
+
0
S.F.D.
42 114
702
459 513
+
B.M.D.
U1 0.6 U2 0 U3
1
0.8 0 0 U1 -Diagram
0
0.8
L0 0.6 L4
0 L1 L2 0 L3 0
U1 0 U2 0.6 U3
0
0 0.8 0.8 0 U2-Diagam
0
L0 L4
0 L1 0 L2 0.6 L3 0
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 139
F′U1L
∆X1L = ∑. (Change in length of first redundant member by applied loads)
AE
U12L
∆X1R1 = ∑
AE X1 (Change in length in first redundant member due to first redundant force)
∆X1R2 = ∑
U1U2L
AE . X2 (Change in length in first redundant member due to second redundant force)
F′U2L
∆X2L = ∑ (Change in second redundant member due to applied load.)
AE
∆X2R1 = ∑
U1U2L
AE . X1 (Change in length of second redundant member due to first redundant force.)
U22L
∆X2R2 = ∑
AE . X2 (Change in length of second redundant member due to redundant force in it.)
Picking up the above deformations from the table (158−A) and calculate final member forces by following
formula.
F = F' + U1X1 + U2X2
Forces in chord members and inclineds are determined by the method of moments and shears as explained
already, while for verticals method of joints has been used.
Evaluation of force in verticals of F′ − Diagram
(Joint L2)
U2 L2
67.5
52.5
76.5 85.5
96
∑ FX = 0
85.5 − 76.5 + 52.5 Sinθ − 67.5 Sinθ = 0
85.5 − 76.5 + 52.5 × 0.6 − 67.5 × 0.6 = 0
0 = 0 (Check)
∑ Fy + 0
U2L2 + 52.5 Cosθ + 67.5 Cos θ − 96 = 0
U2L2 = − 52.5 × 0.8 − 67.5 × 0.8 + 96 = 0
U2L2 = 0
140 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Picking the following values from attached table (Table for example No.12)
∆X1L = + 1.009 × 10−3
∆X1R1 = + 125.7 × 10−6 X1 = + 0.1257 × 10−3 X1
∆X1R2 = + 32 × 10−6 X2 = + 0.032 × 10−3 X2
∆X2L = − 0.171 × 10−3
∆X2R1 = + 32 × 10−6 X1 = + 0.032 × 10−3 X1
∆X2R2 = + 125.7 × 10−6 X2 = + 0.1257 × 10−3 X2
−1.009 − 0.032 X2
From (1) X1 = → (3)
0.1257
Put in (2) & solve for X2
−1.009 − 0.032 X2
− 0.171 + 0.032
0.1257 + 0.1257 X2 = 0
0.428
X2 =
0.1176
X1 = − 8.95 KN
127.5
76.5
102
∑ FX = 0
76.5 − 127.5 Sinθ = 0
76.5 − 127.5 × 0.6 = 0
0=0
∑ Fy = 0
102 − 127.5 × 0.8 = 0
0=0 OK. Results seem to be correct.
The credit for developing method of least work goes to Alberto Castiglianos who worked as an engineer in Italian
Railways. This method was presented in a thesis in partial fulfillment of the requirement for the award of diploma
engineering of associate engineer. He published a paper for finding deflections which is called Castiglianos first
theorem and in consequence thereof, method of least work which is also known as Castiglianos second theorem.
Method of least work also mentioned earlier in a paper by an Italian General Menabrea who was not able to give a
satisfactory proof. Leonard Euler had also used the method about 50 years ago for derivation of equations for
buckling of columns wherein, Daniel Bernolli gave valuable suggestion to him.
Method of least work or Castiglianos second theorem is a very versatile method for the analysis of
indeterminate structures and specially to trussed type structures. The method does not however, accounts
for erection stresses, temperature stresses or differential support sinking. The reader is advised to use some
other method for the analysis of such indeterminate structures like frames and continuos beams.
It must be appreciated in general, for horizontal and vertical indeterminate structural systems, carrying various
types of loads, there are generally more than one structural actions present at the same time including direct forces,
shear forces, bending moments and twisting moments. In order to have a precise analysis all redundant structural
actions and hence strain energies must be considered which would make the method laborious and cumbersome.
Therefore, most of engineers think it sufficient to consider only the significant strain energy. The reader should
know that most of structural analysis approaches whether classical or matrix methods consider equilibrium of
forces and displacement/strain compatibility of members of a system.
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 143
The basis of the method of consistent deformation and method of least work are essentially the same. In
consistent deformation method, the deformation produced by the applied loads are equated to these
produced by the redundants. This process usually results in the evolution of redundants. However, in the
method of least work, total strain energy expression of a structural system in terms of that due to known
applied loads and due to redundants is established. Then the total strain energy is partially differentiated
with respect to redundant which ultimately result in the evolution of the redundant. It must be appreciated
that, for indeterminate structural system like trusses, the unknown redundants maybe external supports
reaction or the internal forces or both. And it may not be very clear which type of redundants should be
considered as the amount of work involved in terms of requisite calculation may vary. Therefore, a clever
choice of redundants (or a basic determinate structure as was the case with consistent deformation method)
may often greatly reduce the amount of work involved.
There is often a debate going on these days regarding the utility or justification of classical structural
analysis in comparison to the computer method of structural analysis. It is commented that in case of
classical methods of structural analysis the student comes across basic and finer points of structural
engineering after which a computer analysis of a complex structure maybe undertaken.
In the absence of basic knowledge of classical structural analysis, the engineer maybe in a difficult position
to justify to computer results which are again to be checked against equilibrium and deformation
compatibility only.
E 4 F
4 4 4.5m
2 2 2 2
A 2 2 2 D
B C
15 kN
3@4.5m
Note:− We select the redundants in such a way that the stability of the structure is not
effected. Selecting member EC as redundant.
E F
x
x 4.5m
A D
B C 15KN
5KN 10KN
F-diagram B.D.S. under the action of applied loads & redundant.
Method of moments and shears has been used to find forces in BDS due to applied loads. A table
has been made. Forces vertical in members in terms of redundant X may be determined by the method of
joints as before. From table.
∂F L
∑ F. . = 0 = − 331.22 × 10−6 + 51.49 × 10−6X
∂x AE
or − 331.22 + 51.49X = 0
X = + 6.433 KN
The final member forces are obtained as below by putting value of X in column 5 of the table.
AB +5
BC +5.45
CD + 10
EF − 9.55
BE + 0.45
CF + 10.45
CE + 6.43
BF − 0.64
AE − 7.07
DF − 14.14
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 145
CHECK.
Joint A.
∑ FX = 0
5 − 7.07 Cosθ = 0
5 − 7.07 × 0.707 = 0
0 = 0
∑ Fy = 0
− 7.07 × 0.707 + 5 = 0
0 = 0 Check is OK.
EXAMPLE NO. 14:− Analyze the following symmetrically loaded second degree internally
indeterminate truss by the method of least work. Areas in ( ) are 10−3m2 . The value of E can be
taken as 200 × 106 KN/m2
D 4 E 4 F
3 3
2 2 2 2 3 3m
A 4 4 C
B
15KN
2@3m
D E F
X1
X2
3m
X1 X2
A C
B 15KN
BDS under loads
7.5KN 7.5KN and redundants.
2@3m
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 147
SOLUTION:
Note :− By virtue of symmetry, we can expect to have same values for X1 and X2. It is known before hand.
7.5 S.F.D.
+
7.5
22.5
+ B.M.D.
SFD and BMD in BDS due to applied loads are shown above.
As in previous case determine member forces in BDS due to applied loads by the method of
moments shears while method of joints may be used to determine member forces due to redundants acting
separately. Apply super position principal. Then these are entered in a table given.
Summation of relavant columns due to X1 and X2 gives two equations from which these can be calculated.
Putting values from table and solving for X1 and X2.
[−2.65 × 10−3 (7.5 − 0.707X1 ) − 2.65 × 103 (− 0.707X1 ) −3.53 × 10−3 (− 0.707X1 )
−3.53 × 10−3(15 − 0.707X1 − 0.707X2 ) +10.6 × 10−3 (−10.6+X1 ) + 10.6 × 10−3 (X2 ) ]10−3 = 0
− 19.875 + 1.874X1 + 1.874 X1 + 2.450 X1 − 52.45 + 2.50 X1 + 2.5 X2 − 112.36 + 10.6 X1 + 10.6 X1 = 0
29.898 X1 + 2.50 X2 − 185.185 = 0 → (1) ( ∑ col 8 )
− 2.65 × 10−3(7.5−0.707 X2) − 2.65 × 10−3 (− 0.707 X2) − 3.53 × 10−3 (15−0.707 X1 − 0.707 X2)
− 3.53 × 10−3 (− 0.707 X2 ) + 10.6 × 10−3 (−10.6+X2) + 10.6 × 10−3 X2 = 0
X2 = + 5.716 KN
Put X2 in equation 3 to get X1. The final member forces are given in last column. These are
obtained by putting values of X1 and X2, whichever is applicable, in column 5 of the table.
148 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
X1 = + 5.716 KN
Equilibrium Check.
4.04
4.884
3.459
7.5
∑ FX = 0
3.459 − 4.884 × Cosθ = 0
3.459 − 4.884 × 0.707 = 0
0 = 0
∑ Fy = 0
7.5 − 4.04 − 4.884 × 0.707 = 0
0 = 0 Checks are satisfied. Results are OK.
EXAMPLE NO. 15:− Analyze the following internally indeterminate truss by the method of least
work. Areas in ( ) are 10−3m2 . The value of E can be taken as 200 × 10 6 KN/m2.
SOLUTION:−
b = 13 , r = 3 , j = 7 so degree of indeterminacy I =( b + r ) –2j =2
Choosing members EB and BG as redundants, forces due to loads have been determined by the method of
moments and shears for the BDS and are entered in a table. While forces due to redundants X1 and X2.
E F G
X1 X2
X1 X2 3m
A D
B 15KN C
E F G
X2
X1
X1 X2 3m
A D
B 15KN C
CD
∑ Fy = 0
DG Sinθ − 0
DG = 0
∑ FX = 0
DG Cos θ + CD = 0
CD = 0
Joint G :−
FG
X2
CG
∑ FX = 0
− FG − X2 Cos θ = 0
FG = − 0.707 X2
∑ Fy = 0
− CG − X2 Sin θ = 0
CG = − 0.707 X2
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 151
Joint C :−
0.707X2
CF
BC
∑ Fy = 0
CF Sin θ − 0.707 X2 = 0
0.707 X2
CF =
0.707
CF = + X2
∑ FX = 0
− BC − CF Cos θ = 0
BC = −0.707 X2
Joint B.
X1 BF X2
AB 0.707X2
∑ FX = 0
− 0.707 X2 − AB + X2 Cos θ − X1 Cos θ = 0
AB = − 0.707 X1
∑ Fy = 0
X1 Sin θ + X2 Sin θ + BF = 0
BF = − 0.707X1 − 0.707X2
Joint A.
AE
AF
0.707X1
∑ FX = 0
− 0.707 X1 + AF Cos θ = 0
AF = X1
152 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∑ Fy = 0
AE + AF Sin θ = 0
AE = − 0.707X1
Joint E.
EF
X1
0.707 X1
∑ FX = 0
EF + X1 Cos θ = 0
EF = − 0.707 X1
∑ Fy = 0
0.707 X1 − 0.707 X1 = 0
0 = 0 (Check)
Entering the values of summations from attached table, we have.
∂F L
∑ F. . = 0 = − 229.443 × 10−6 +29.848 × 10−6 X1+2.45 × 10−6X2
∂X1 AE
∂F L
∑ F. . = 0 = −168.9 × 10−6 +2.45 × 10−6 X1+29.848 × 10−6 X2
∂X2 AE
Simplifying
− 229.443 + 29.848 X1 + 2.45 X2 = 0 → (1)
− 168.9 + 2.45 X1 + 29.848 X2 = 0 → (2)
From (1)
− 2.45 X2 + 229.443
X1 = → (3)
29.848
Put in (2) & solve for X2
− 2.45 X2 + 229.443
− 168.9 + 2.45
29.848 + 29.848 X2 = 0
− 168.9 − 0.201 X2 + 18.833 + 29.848 X2 = 0
− 150.067 + 29.647 X2 = 0
150.067
X2 =
29.647
X2 = + 5.062 KN
METHOD OF LEAST WORK 153
X1 = + 7.272 KN
EQUILIBRIUM CHECKS :−
5.141 F 8.579 G
E
6.87 2.000
6.28 5.662 7.07
5.141
1.421
7.272
A D
4.859 B 6.421 C 5
15KN
10KN 5KN
Joint B:−
7.272 6.28
5.062
4.859 6.421
15
∑ FX = 0
6.421 + 5.062 Cosθ − 7.272 Cosθ − 4.859 = 0
0 = 0
∑ Fy = 0
6.28 − 15 + 5.062 Sinθ + 7.272 Sinθ = 0
0 = 0 The results are OK.
Joint C:−
1.421
2.008
6.421 5
∑ FX = 0
5 + 2.008 Cosθ − 6.421 = 0
0 = 0
∑ Fy = 0
1.421 − 2.008 Sinθ = 0
0 = 0 Results are OK.
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 155
CHAPTER THREE
P P P
Support,
abutments or
springing. y M=Mo-Hy
H A B H
where MX is the B.M., in the arch at a distance x . H is the horizontal thrust at the springings & y
is the rize of the arch at a distance. ‘x’ as shown in the diagram. The ( ± ) sign is to be used with care and a
(−) sign will be used if the horizontal thrust is inwards or vice versa. In later case it will behave as a beam.
156 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
P P P
H A B H
Va Vb
Under transverse loads, the horizontal thrust at either of the springings abutments is equal. In the
arch shown above, the degree of indeterminacy is one and let us consider the horizontal thrust at support B
as the redundant. The above loaded arch can be considered equal to the following two diagrams wherein a
BDS arch is under the action of loads plus the same BDS arch under the action of inward unit horizontal
load at the springings.
=
P P P
B
A B
Va Vb
BL
1
A B
BR
(Flattened arch recovers some of horizontal displacement at B due to unit horizontal loads and will recover
fully if full horizontal thirst is applied at B.)
(Arch flattens out under the action of applied loads because freedom in the horizontal direction has been
provided at point B.) and all due to full redundant value. This forces the basis of compatibility.
∆BR stands for displacement of point. B (in the direction of force) due to unit horizontal redundant force at B.
Remember that a horizontal reactive component cannot be realized at the roller support. However, we can
always apply a horizontal force at the roller.
3.2. Compatibility equation.
∆BL − ( ∆BR ) H = 0 ( If unit load is applied in opposite sense so that it also produces
flettening, +ve sign may be used in the equation and the final sign with H will be self adjusting.)
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 157
We will be considering strain energy stored in bending only.The modified expression for that for
curved structural members is as follows.
M2ds
U=∫
2EI
Where ds is the elemental length along the centre line of the arch and U is the strain energy stored
in bending along centre-line of arch. The bending moment at a distance x from support is
Where Mo = Simple span bending moment ( S.S.B.M.) in a similar loaded simple beam.
M2 ds
U = ∫ 2EI
If H is chosen as redundant, then differentiating U w.r.t. H , we have
∂U ∂M
. M. ds
∫
1
= ∆BH = 0 = Put M= Mo – Hy and then differentiate.
∂H EI ∂H
∂U
∫
1
= ∆BH = 0 = . (Mo − Hy)(−y) ds by putting M from (1)
∂H EI
(Hy2 − Mo y) ds
0= ∫ EI
Simlifying
H y2 ds
∫ ∫
Mo y ds
− =0
EI EI
H y2 ds
∫ ∫
Mo y ds
=
EI EI
or
Moy.ds
∫
EI
H =
y2ds
∫
EI
∫
Mo y ds
Applying Castigliano’s 2nd theorem, ∆BL becomes =
EI
y2 ds
and ∆BR = ∫ EI
158 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
The algebraic integration of the above integrals can also be performed in limited number of cases
when EI is a suitable function of S ( total curved arch length), otherwise, go for numerical integration.
For prismatic (same cross section) members which normally have EI constant, the above
expression can be written as follows:
∫ Mo y ds
H =
∫ y2ds
In the ancient times, three hinged arches have been used to support wide spans roofs. However,
their use is very rare in bridge construction since the discontinuity at the crown hinge is communicated to
the main deck of the bridge. In three hinged arches, all reactive components are found by statical
considerations without considering the deformations of the arch rib. Therefore, they are insensitive to
foundation movements and temperature changes etc., and are statically determinate. These are covered as a
separate chapter in this book.
The Romans exploited the potential of arches to a great extent. However, their emperical analysis
approach became available in the early 18th century.
This is the equation for the centre line of a linear arch. With the change in position and the number
of loads on the arch, the corresponding linear arch would also change as Mo keeps on changing. Therefore,
there are infinite number of such arches for every load pattern and position on the actual arch.
EXAMPLE NO. 1:
3.5. ANALYSIS OF TWO – HINGED SEGMENTAL ARCHES
We develop the method for indeterminate arches starting with the simplest cases of segmental arches. Solve the
following segmental arch by using the basic principles of consistent deformation method and by treating horizontal
thrust at support D as the redundant. The segmental arches could be used in tunnels and in water ways.
20KN/m
B C
4m EI=Constant
Ha=20 kN D
A
2m 4m 2m
8m
40 kN 40 kN
20KN/m
B C
4m EI=Constant
Ha=20 kN D
A
2m 4m 2m
8m
40 kN 40 kN
(Ha will occur only point D is a hinge support)
M − Diagram. Due to applied loads. Similarly reactions due to supermetrical loading.
B C
1 A D 1
DR
m − Diagram. Due to unit redundant at D.
(X is varied along length of members). Find Cosθ and Sinθ.
cos θ = 0.4472 , sin θ = 0.8944.
160 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
−40
Sab sin θ + 40 =0 so Sab= = − 44.722. Consider equilibrium of joint A and project forces
0.8944
in y-direction. (M-diagram)
Consider same diagram with roller at D. Now consider joint A and Project forces in X direction to
evaluate Ha. Sab Cosθ + Ha = 0 or –44.722 x 0.4472 + Ha = 0
or Ha= 20KN
Compatibility equation
∆DL − ∆DR. H = 0
∆DL Horizontal displacement of D due to loads
Or H = =
∆DR Horizontal displacement of D due to redundants
∫
Mmdx
∆DL =
EI
Applying Unit load method concepts,
m2 dx
∆DR =
EI∫
Now we attempt the evaluation of these integrals in a tabular form. X is measured along member
axis.
4.472 4
∫
MmdX 1 1
∆DL = = ∫ (17.88X)(+0.894X)dX + ∫ 80+40X −10X)(+4) dX
EI EI o EI o
4.472
1
+ ∫ (17.88 X)(+0.894 X) dX
EI o
4.472 4
2 1
= ∫ (+15.985 X2)dX + ∫ (+320+160X − 40X2) dX Integrate and put limits
EI o EI o
3 4.472 4
+31.969 X 1 160X2 40X2
= + +320X + −
EI 3 o EI 2 3 o
1
× 16
+10.656 40
= ( 4.4723 − 0) + +320 × 4 +80 × 16 −
EI EI 3
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 161
+ 2659.72
∆DL =
EI
4.472 4 4.472
m2dX
∫
1 1 1
∆DR = = ∫ (+ 0.894X)2 dX + ∫ 16 dX + ∫ (+ 0.894X)2 dX
EI EI o EI o EI o
4.472 4
2 16
= ∫ 0.799 X2 dX + ∫ dX
EI o EI o
4.472 4
1.598 X3 16
= + X
EI 3 o EI o
0.533 16
= [(4.472)3 − 0] + (4 − 0)
EI EI
111.653
∆DR =
EI
∆DL
H =
∆DR
2659.72/EI
=
111.653/EI
H = 23.82 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 2:− Solve the following arch by using consistent deformation method.
20KN/m
40KN B C
4m EI-Constt
A D
2m 4m 2m
The above redundant / segmental arch can be replaced by the following similar arches carrying loads
and redundant unit load.
20KN/m
40KN B C
x
X is varied along
member lengths.
4m
40KN
A D
2m 4m 2m
DL
Ra=20KN
Rd=60KN
M-Diagram
ΣMa = 0 ; Rd × 8 = 20 × 4 × 4 + 40× 4
∴ Rd = 60 KN so Ra = 20 KN
+
B C
x X is varied along
member lengths.
1 A D 1
DR
m − Diagram
Compatibility equation is
∆DL − ∆DR.H = 0
∫
MmdX
and ∆DL =
EI
m2 dX
∆DR = ∫ EI
4.472 4
∫
MmdX 1 1
∆DL = = ∫ (+44.72X)(0.894X) dX + ∫ (−10X2 +20X − 200 ) 4 dX
EI EI o EI o
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 163
4.472
1
+ ∫ (26.82X ) (0.894X)dX
EI o
4.472 4 4.472
m2 dX
∫
1 1 1
∆DR = = ∫ (0.894X)2 + ∫ 16dX + ∫ (0.894X)2
EI EI o EI o EI o
4.472 4
2 16
= ∫ 0.799X2 dX + ∫ dX
EI o EI o
4.472 4
1.598 X3 16
= + X
EI 3 o EI o
0.533 16
= [ (4.472)3 − 0 ] + ( 4 − 0)
EI EI
111.653
∆DR =
EI
∆DL
∴ H =
∆DR
+ 4893.8/EI
=
111.653/EI
So H = + 43.83 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 3:- Determine the horizontal thrust for the for following loaded segmental arch. Take EI
equal to constant.
P P
C G D
3m
B E
4m
A F
3m 4m 5m 4m 3m
164 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
SOLUTION :−
P X P
C G
D
X X is varied along
member length
B E
A F
P P
Now consider a BDS under Loads and redundant separately for the same arch and evaluate integrals.
An inspection of the arch indicates that it is symmetrical about point G and is indeterminate to the first
degree choosing horizontal reaction at F as the redundant, we draw two basic determinate structures under
the action of applied loads and the redundant horizontal thirst at support F.
P P
X
C G D
B
E
A F
3m 4m 5m 4m 3m
P P
M-Diagram (BDS under loads)
C E
B E
1 F 1
A
B.D.S. under unit horizontal
redundant load at F.
m-Diagram
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 165
CG C 0 − 2.5 P (7+X) − PX = 7 P 7
5 5 2.5
(0.6 PX)(0.8X) P(3+0.8X)(4+0.6X) 49 P
∆FL = 2 ∫ dX + 2 ∫ dX+ 2 ∫ dX
o EI o EI o EI
5 5 2.5
=
2P
EI
[ ∫ 0.48 X dX + ∫ (0.48 X +5X+12)dX + ∫ 49 dX]
o
2
o
2
o
5 5 2.5
2 2 2
∆FR = ∫ (0.8X)2dX + ∫ (16 + 0.36X2 + 4.8X) dX + ∫ 49dX
EI o EI o EI o
608.33 ∆FL
∆FR = , H =
EI ∆FR
570 P
H =
608.32
So H = 0.937 P
166 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
3m
B 1 E
P
X
4m
A F
3m 4m 5m 4m 3m
Ra Rf
P P
X
P 1
X
P
3m 4m 5m 4m 3m
M-Diagram
0.789 P 1.211 P
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 167
C D
3m
B E
4m
1 1
A F
3m 4m 5m 4m 3m
5 5
∆FL =
1
EI
[ ∫ (1.2734 PX)(0.8 X)dX + ∫ (0.6312 PX + 6.367 P)
o o
5
(4 + 0.6X) dX + ∫ (− 0.211 PX + 9.523 P)(7)dX
o
5 5
+ ∫ (3.633 P + 0.9688 PX)(4 + 0.6X) + ∫ (0.7266PX (0.8X) dX
o o
]
5 5
=
P
EI
[ ∫ 1.01872X dX + ∫ (2.5248X + 0.37872X + 25.468 + 3.8202 X) dX
o
2
o
2
5 5
+ ∫ (− 1.477X + 66.661) dX + ∫ (14.532 + 2.1798X
o o
5
+ 3.8752X + 0.58128X2 ) dX + ∫ 0.58128X dX . Simplifying we get.
o
5
P
= ∫ (1.97872X2 + 11.50428X + 106.661) dX
EI o
5
P X3 X2
∆FL = 1.97972 + 11.50428 + 106.661X
EI 3 2 o
168 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
P 53 52
= 1.97872 × + 11.50428 × + 106.661 × 5
EI 3 2
759.56 P
∆FL =
EI
5 5
∆FR =
1
EI
[ ∫ (0.8X) dX + ∫ (16+0.36X + 4.8X) dX
o
2
o
2
5 5 5
+ ∫ 49 dX + ∫ (16+0.36X2+4.8X) dX + ∫ 0.64 X2 dX
o o o
]
5
1 0.64X3 X3 X2 X3 4.8X2 0.64X3
= + 16X + 0.36 + 4.8 + 49X + 16X + 0.36 + +
EI 3 3 2 3 2 3 o
0.36 × 5 4.8 × 5 3 2
=
1
EI
[ 0.64
3
× 5 + 16 × 5 +
3
3
+
2
+ 49 × 5
+ 16 × 5 +
0.36
3
× 53 +
4.8
2
× 52 +
0.64
3
× 53 ] . Simplifying
608.33
∆FR = . Compatibility equation remains the same. Putting values of integrals, we have
EI
∆FL
H =
∆FR
759.56 P 608.33
=
EI EI
P P
C D
B E
P
0.2486P F 1.2486P
A
0.789P 1.211P
Check : ∑ Mc = 0
0.789P × 7 − 0.2486 P × 7 − P × 3 + P × 5 + 1.2486 P × 7 − 1.211P × 12 = 0
0 = 0 O.K.
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 169
P P
X C
F E yc
A y B
D
L
R
R
The circular arches are infact a portion of the circle and are commonly used in bridge construction.
From the knowledge of determinate circular arches, it is known that the maximum thrust and the vertical
reactions occur at the springings. Therefore, logically there should be a greater moment of inertia near the
springings rather than that near the mid−span of the arch. The approach is called the secant variation of
inertia and is most economical. However, to establish the basic principles, we will first of all consider
arches with constant EI. The following points are normally required to be calculated in the analysis.
(1) Horizontal thrust at the springings.
(2) B.M. & the normal S.F. at any section of the arch.
Usually, the span and the central rise is given and we have to determine;
(i) the radius of the arch;
(ii) the equation of centre line of the circular arch.
Two possible analysis are performed.
(1) Algebraic integration.
(2) Numerical integration.
After solving some problems, it will be amply demonstrated that algebraic integration is very
laborious and time consuming for most of the cases. Therefore, more emphasis will be placed on numerical
integration which is not as exact but gives sufficiently reliable results. Some researches have shown that if
arch is divided in sixteen portions, the results obtained are sufficiently accurate. In general, the accuracy
increases with the increase or more in number of sub−divisions of the arch.
By considering ∆ ADO
R2 = (R−yc)2 + (L /2 )2
R2 = R2 − 2Ryc + yc2 + L2/4
0 = yc ( yc − 2 R) + L2/4
or yc ( yc − 2 R) = − L2/4
− yc ( yc − 2 R ) = L2/4
L2
yc (2R − yc) = (1)
4
By considering ∆ EFO
OF2 = OE2 + EF2
R2 = ( R − yc + y )2 + X2
R − X2 = ( R − yc + y )2
2
R − yc + y = R2 − x2
S
2 R
y = R2 − X2 − (R − yc) (2)
The detailed derivation of this equation can be found in some other Chapter of this book.
In this case, S = R ( 2 θ ) where θ is in radiains. S is the total length along centre line of the arch.
∫ Myds
H= as before obtained By eliminating EI as we are considering EI = Constt
∫y2ds
EXAMPLE NO. 5:−
A two− hinged circular arch carries a concentrated force of 50 KN at the centre. The span & the
rise of the arch are 60m & 10m respectively. Find the horizontal thrust at the abutments.
SOLUTION :− The arch span is divided in ten equal segments and ordinates are considered at the centre of
each segment.
30m 50KN
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(2) (10)
(1) 10
A B
D
60m
R=50m
0
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 171
L2 yc
R = + , where R = Redious, yc = Central rise and L = Span of arch.
8yc 2
(60)2 10
= +
8 × 10 2
R = 50 m
30
Sinα = = 0.6 . Now compute angle α is radians.
50
180° = π rad
π
1° = rad
180
π
So 36.87° = × 36.87 radians
180
S = 64.35 m
50KN
C
x E yc=10m
A y B
30-x D 25KN
25KN
R
R=50m
0
∫ Myds
H =
∫y2ds
where M = Simple span ( S.S ) B.M. in the arch due to applied loads only.
OD = R − yc = 50 − 10 = 40 m
y = R Cos θ − 40
and ds = Rdθ
X = R Sin θ
Evaluation of Numerator :−
Mx = 25 (30 − X), ds = Rdθ, y = RCosθ − 40
α
∫ Myds = 2 ∫ [25 (30 − R Sinθ)] [R Cosθ−40] [Rdθ], By putting X, y and ds from above. Also put
o
value of α which is in radians.
0.6435
= 50 R ∫ (30 − R Sinθ)(R Cosθ − 40) dθ, we know, 2Sinθ Cosθ = Sin 2θ.
o
0.6435
= 50R ∫ (30R Cosθ Cosθ − R2Sinθ Cosθ − 1200 + 40R Sinθ) dθ
o
0.6435
= 50R 30R Sinθ + − 1200 θ − 40R Cosθ
R2 Cos 2θ
. Put limits now
2 2 o
502
= 50 × 50 30×50×0.6+ ×1+ 40 × 50 ×1
2500
× 0.28−1200×0.6435−40×50×0.8 −
4 4
= + 194500
∫ Myds = 194.5 × 103
Evaluation of Denominator :−
1
We know Cos2θ = (1 + Cos2θ)
2
1
and Sin2θ = (1 − Cos2θ)
2
0.6435
∫y2ds = 2 ∫ (RCosθ − 40)2 (Rdθ)
o
0.6435
= 2R ∫ (R2 Cos2 θ − 80R Cosθ + 1600) dθ
o
0.6435 2
= 2R ∫ R (1 + Cos 2θ) − 80 R Cos θ + 1600 dθ Integrate
o 2
0.6435
= 2R θ +
Sin 2θ
− 80R Sin θ + 1600 θ
R2
Put limits now
2 2 o
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 173
502
= 2 × 50
0.96
2 0.6435 + 2 − 80 × 50 × 0.6 + 1600 × 0.6435
= 3397.5
or y = 502 − X2 − (50 − 10 )
Section. X y. M My y2
1 27 2.08 75 156.00 4.33
2 21 5.380 225 1210.50 28.94
3 15 7.69 375 3883.75 59.14
4 9 9.18 525 4819.50 84.27
5 3 9.91 675 6689.25 98.21
6 3 9.91 675 6689.25 98.21
7 9 9.18 525 4819.50 84.27
8 15 7.69 375 2883.75 59.14
9 21 5.380 225 1210.50 28.94
10 27 2.08 75 156.00 4.33
∑31518 ∑549.78
S = 64.35 m
64.35
and ds =
10
ds = 6.435 m
174 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∫ Myds ∑ Myds
H= =
∫ y2ds ∑ y2ds
31518 × 6.435
= ( Note:- ds cancels out )
549.78 × 6.435
H = 57.33 KN
I = Io sec. α and
ds Cos α =dX
ds
dy
dx
Or ds = dX Sec α
∫
Myds
EI
H =
y2ds
∫ EI
∫
Myds
I
H = Put I= Io sec α
y2ds
∫ I
My dX Sec α
∫ Io Secα
H =
y2dX Sec α
∫ Io Sec α
∫ MydX
H =
∫ y2 dX
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 175
If we utilize the above expression for horizontal thrust, it may be kept in mind that integration can
now take place in the Cartesian coordinate system instead of the polar coordinate system.
We know, y = R2 − X2 − (R − yc)
y = 502 − X2 − 40
30
∫ MydX = 2 ∫ 25 (30 − X)[ 502 − X2 − 40 ] dX
o
30 30 30 30
= 50 [ 30 ∫ 502 − X2 . dX − ∫ 1200dX − ∫ 502 − X2 . XdX + 40 ∫ XdX ]
o o o o
30 30 30 30
= 1500 ∫ 502 − X2 dX − 1200 × 50 ∫ dX − 50 ∫ 502 − X2 XdX + 2000 ∫ XdX
o o o o
Put X = 50 Sin θ= R sinθ
dX = 50 Cosθ dθ
At X= 0 θ=0
At X = 30 θ = 0.6435
Now Evaluate integrals
Substitutions
Cos2θ
Cos2θ = 1 +
2
θ Sin2
θ
∫Cos2θ = +
2 4
Cos3θ
∫Cos2θ Sinθdθ = −
3
by letting X = Cosθ
dX = −Sin θdθ
0.6435 30
∫ MydX = 1500 ∫ 502 (1 − Sin2θ) (50 Cosθdθ ) − 60000 X
o o
(502 − X2 )3/2
30 30
+ 25
X2
+ 2000
3/2 o 2 o
0.6435
(1 + Cos2θ)
= 1500 × 502 ∫ dθ − 6 × 104 (30)
o 2
176 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
50
+ [(502 − 302)3/2 − (302) + 1000 (302 )]
3
0.6435
= 187.5 × 104 θ +
Sin 2θ
− 180 × 104 − 1016666.666 + 90 × 104
2 o
Sin(2 × 0.6435)
∫ MydX = 187.5 × 104 0.6435 +
2 − 1916666.666
= 2106561.918 − 1916666.666
∫ MydX = 189895.252
30
∫ y2dX = 2 ∫ (502 − X2 +402 − 80 502 − X2 ) dX
o
30
= 2 ∫ (4100 − X2 − 80 502 − X2 ) dX
o
Substitutions:
X = 50 Sin θ
dX = 50 Cosθdθ
1 − Sin2θ = Cos2θ
30 30 0.6435
= 8200 ∫ dX − 2 ∫ X2 dX − 160 ∫ 502 Cos2 θ dθ
o o o
0.6435
160 × 502
30 30
X3
= 8200 X | − 2 − ∫ (1 + Cos 2θ)dθ
o 3 o 2 o
160 × 502
0.6435
2 Sin 2θ
= 8200 (30) − (303) − θ+
3 2 2 o
= 228000 − 224699.938
∫y2dX = 3300.062
∫ MydX
H =
∫ y2dX
189895.252
=
3300.062
H = 57.543 KN
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 177
EXAMPLE NO. 7:- A circular arch carries a uniformly distributed load on its left half, calculate the
horizontal thrust.
10KN/m
C
yc=10m
A B
D
60m
SOLUTION :− Determine Vertical Support reactions as usual and write moment expressions due to
applied loads only without considering horizontal thrust.
10KN/m
C
y x E x
yc=10m B
A D
75KN
60m
225KN
OD = OC − CD = 50 − 10 = 40 m
y = OE − OD = R Cosθ − 40
∫ Myds
so H =
∫ y2ds
178 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Evaluation of Numerator.
0.6435
∫ Myds = ∫ [225 (30 − R Sinθ) − 5(30 − R Sinθ)2 ] [ R Cosθ − 40] (Rdθ)
o
0.6435
+∫ [75(30 − R Sinθ)] [R Cosθ − 40 ] [Rdθ ]. This consists of two integrals.
o
Evaluate First Integral
0.6435
= I1 = R ∫ [6750 − 225 R Sinθ − 4500 − 5 R2 Sin2 θ + 300 R Sinθ] [R Cos θ − 40]
o
0.6435
I1 = R ∫
o
[2250 + 75 R Sinθ − 5 R Sin θ][R Cos θ − 40] dθ
2 2
0.6435
=R∫
o
[2250 R Cos θ + 75 R Sin θ Cosθ −5 R Sin θ Cosθ
2 3 2
Let X = Sinθ
dX = cosθ dθ
X3 Sin3θ
So ∫Sin2θ Cosθ dθ = ∫X2 dX = =
3 3
1 − Cos2θ
− 90000 − 3000 R Sinθ + 200 R2 ]
2 dθ
75 2 Cos2 θ R3 Sin3θ
=R 2250 R Sin θ −
2
R
2
−5
3
− 90000 θ
Sin2 θ
0.6435
200 2
+ 3000 R Cosθ + R θ− |
2 2 o
× 502 0.6435 −
200 0.96
− 90000 × 0.6435 + 3000 × 50 × 0.8 +
2 2
+
75
4
× 2500 × 1 − 3000 × 50 × 1 ]
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 179
= 50 ( 9210 )
I1 = 460.5 × 103
Now Evaluate
0.6435
2nd Integral = I2 = R ∫ (2250 − 75 R Sin θ)(R Cos θ − 40) ( dθ ) multiply two expressions.
o
0.6435
I2 = R ∫ 2250 R Cos θ − 75 R2 Sin θ Cos θ − 90000 + 3000 R Sin θ) dθ Integrate now.
o
0.6435
75 2 Cos 2θ
= R 2250R Sin θ + R − 90000 θ − 3000R Cosθ |
2 2 o
75
= 50 (2250 × 50 × 0.6 + × 2500 × 0.28 − 90000 × 0.6435
4
75
− 3000 × 50 × 0.8 − × 2500 × 1 + 3000 × 50 × 1)
4
I2 = 291.75 × 103
Add these two integrals (I1 and I2) of ∫Myds.
∫ Myds = I1 + I2
= 460.5 × 103 + 291.75 × 103
or ∫ Myds = 752.25 × 103
Now Evaluate
0.6435
∫ y2ds =2∫ (R Cosθ − 40)2 ( R dθ )
o
0.6435
1+Cos2θ
=2R∫ (R2Cos2θ + 1600 − 80 R Cosθ)dθ ; We know that Cos2θ =
o 2
0.6435
R2
=2R∫ (1 + Cos2θ) + 1600 − 80 R Cosθ dθ
o 2
0.6435
R2
θ + Sin + 1600 θ − 80 R Sinθ |
2θ
=2R
2 2 o
2
= 2 × 50 [502 0.6435+0.96
2
+1600 × 0.6435 − 80 × 50 × 0.6], So ∫ y ds=3.3975×10
2 3
180 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
∫ Myds
H =
∫ y2ds
752.25 × 103
H =
3.3975 × 103
H = 221.42 KN
10KN/m
C
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)(9)
(2) (10)
(1)
A B
D
R=50m
Note: X is measured for mid span and y is corresponding rise. Now attempt in a tabular form.
Section X y M My y2
1. 27 2.08 630 1310.4 4.33
2 21 5.38 1620 8715.6 28.94
3 15 7.69 2250 17302.5 59.14
4 9 9.18 2520 23133.6 84.27
5 3 9.91 2430 24081.3 98.21
6 3 9.91 2025 20067.75 98.21
7 9 9.18 1575 14458.5 84.27
8 15 7.69 1125 8651.25 59.14
9 21 5.38 675 3624.75 28.94
10 27 2.08 225 468 4.33
∑121813.65 ∑549.78
S = R (2 α )
= 50 × 2 × 0.6435
S = 64.35 m
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 181
64.35
so ds = = 6.435 m , (Because S has been divided in Ten Segments)
10
∫ Myds
H =
∫ y2ds
∑ Myds
=
∑ y2ds
121813.65 × 6.435
= ( Note: ds cancels out )
549.78 × 6.435
H = 221.57 KN
Same answer as obtained by algebraic integration.
EXAMPLE NO. 9: Analyze the previous arch for by assuming secant variation of inertia.
Integrate along the x − axis by considering arch to be a beam.
Mac = 225 (30 − X) − 5 (30 − X)2 0 < X < 30
Mbc = 75 (30 − X) 0 < X < 30
y = 502 − X2 − 40
30
∫ MydX = ∫ [225 (30 − X) − 5 (30 − X)2 ] [ 502 − X2 − 40] dX
o
30
+ ∫ [75 (30 − X)] [ 502 − X2 − 40] dX , By taking y expression common, we have
o
30
∫ MydX = ∫ [6750 − 225X − 5 (900 − 60X + X2 ) +2250 − 75X] [ 502 − X2 − 40)] dX
o
30
= ∫ (− 5X2 + 4500)[ 502 − X2 − 40] dX X terms cancel out
o
By using the above formulas and solving the integral, we get the value as follows.
30
∫y2dX =2∫ [ (502 − X2) − 40]2 dX. By evaluating on similar lines as stated above; we have.
o
= 3322.0
∫ MydX
H =
∫ y2 dX
730607.23
=
3322.0
H = 220.0 KN
yc
A B
L
Equation of the centre line of a parabolic arch with either abutment as origin is
y = CX (L − X) → (1)
L
At X= y = yc Putting
2
L
L−
L
yc = C ×
2 2
L L
yc = C.
2 2
C. L2
yc =
4
4 yc
C= 2
L
4 yc
y= X (L − X)
L2
4 yc X
y= (L − X), rated for 0<X<L
L2
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 183
dy 4 yc
and = 2 (L − 2X) 0<X<L
dX L
∫ MydX
So H =
∫ y2dX
In parabolic arches, origin for X is usually their supports.
EXAMPLE NO. 10:− A two−hinged parabolic arch with secant variation of inertia is subjected to the
loads at 3rd points as shown in the diagram. Determine the horizontal thrust at abutments & plot the B.M.D.
SOLUTION:−
40KN 40KN
20m D 20m
C
yc
A B
D
40KN X
60m 40KN
It is a symmetrically loaded arch. So moment expression on simple span in portions AC and CD may be
found and corresponding integrals may be evaluated and multiplied by 2.
Mac = 40 X 0 < X < 20
4 . 10 . X
= (60 − X)
602
20
∫ MydX = 2 ∫ (40 X)(0.011 × 60 X − 0.011 X2)dX
o
30
+2 ∫ 800(0.66 X − 0.011X2 ) dX
20
Simplifying
20 30
= 2 ∫ (26.4 X2 − 0.44 X3 ) dX + 2 ∫ (528X − 8.8X2)dX
o o
20 30
26.4 X3 0.44 X4 528 X2 8.8 X3
=2 − + 2
3 4 o 2 − 3 20
184 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
=2 4 528 3
26.4 0.44 2 8.8 528 8.8
3 × 20 − 4 × 20 + 2 2 × 30 − 3 × 30 − 2 × 20 + 3 × 20
3 3 2
= 105600 + 152533.33
= 258133.33
60
∫ y2dX = ∫ (0.011 × 60 X − 0.011 X2 )2 dX
o
60
= ∫ [(0.66)2 X2 + (0.011)2 X4 − 2 × 0.66 × 0.011 X3]dX
o
60
= ∫ (0.4356 X2 + 1.21 × 10−4 X4 − 0.01452 X3) dX
o
= 3136.32
∫ y2dX = 3.136 ×103
∫ MydX
H =
∫ y2dX
258.133 × 103
=
3.136 × 103
H = 82.3 KN
40KN 40KN
20m 20m
C D
10m 8.8m
8.8m
A B
40KN 40KN
60m
823
800
800 linear arch
8.0 parablic (2nd degree)
924.24
724.2
0 0
Note:− The length of the segment should be even multiple of span. More than 5 or 6 segments will give
slightly improved answer.
3.10. EDDY’S THEOREM:− The difference between the linear arch and the actual arch is the BMD at that
point.
EXAMPLE NO. 11:- Analyze the following loaded two hinged arch by numerical integration method.
40kN 40kN
20m 20m
C D E
y=10m
c
1 2 3 4 5 6
A B
Section X y M My y2
1 5 3.025 200 605 9.15
2 15 7.425 600 4455 55.13
3 25 9.625 800 7700 92.64
4 35 9.625 800 7700 92.64
5 45 7.425 600 4455 55.13
6 55 3.025 200 605 9.15
∑25520 ∑313.84
60
L = 60 m , dX = = 10 m
6
∑ MydX
H=
∑y2dX
25520 × 10
=
313.84 × 10
H = 81.31 KN
10KN/m
yc=10m
A B
4 . 10 . X
= (L − X)
602
= 0.011 X (60 − X)
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 187
dy
y = 0.66 X − 0.011 X2 and = 0.66 − 0.022X = Tanθ
dX
30 30
∫ MydX = ∫ (225X − 5 X2) (0.66 X − 0.011 X2) dX + ∫ 75 X (0.66 X − 0.011 X2) dX
o o
30 30
= ∫ (148.5 X2 − 2.475 X3 − 3.3 X3 + 0.055 X4) dX + ∫ (49.5 X2 − 0.825 X3) dX
o o
30 30
148.5 X3 2.475 X4 3.3 X4 0.055 X5 49.5 X3 0.825 X4
= − − +
3 4 4
+
5 o 3 − 4 o
60
= ∫ [(0.662) X2 + (0.011)2 X4 − 2 . 0.66 . 0.011 X3] dX
o
60
X3 X5 X4
= (0.66)2 + (0.011)2 − 2 . 0.66 . 0.011
3 5 4 o
−3
= 3.136 × 10
712.8 103
H =
3.136 103
H = 227.30 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 13:- Now Analyze the previous example. BY NUMERICAL INTEGRATION :−
10KN
(3) C (4)
(2) (5)
(1) (6)
A B
Section X y M My y2
1 5 3.025 1000 3025 9.15
2 15 7.425 2250 16706.25 55.13
3 25 9.625 2500 24062.5 92.64
4 35 9.625 1875 18046.875 92.64
5 45 7.425 1125 8353.125 55.13
6 55 3.05 375 1134.375 9.15
∑71328.125 ∑313.84
71328.125 . 10
H =
313.84 . 10
H = 227.28 KN
WE GET THE SAME ANSWER AS WAS OBTAINED BY ALGEBRAIC INTEGRATION.
y15 = 0.66 X 15 − 0.011 (15)2 = 2.425 m
y45 = 7.425 m
10KN/m
2250 2250
1125
+ Mo-diagram
2273
1687.7 1687.7
Hy-diagram
2273 2250
1687.7
1125
M-diagram
29.99m
X = 29.99 m
Insert this value back in Mx expression to find M max in the arch.
EXAMPLE NO. 14:- Analyze the following arch by algebraic and numerical integration. Consider :
2 KN/m
5KN
20m
6m
70m
Generally arches have been used by the engineers and architects dating back to old roman buildings,
Mughal and Muslim architecture. Main applications are in bridges, churches, mosques and other buildings.
Arch behaviour is dependent upon stiffness of supports, commonly called abutments or springings so that
horizontal reaction develops.
SOLUTION :−
A. PARABOLIC ARCH AND ALGEBRAIC INTEGRATION
2KN/m
5KN
x C 20m
D
70x52.5 5x20 A B
+ = 53.93 70m
70 70
53.93KN 21.07KN
Determine simple span bending moments.
4.6.X
= ( 70 − X)
702
= 4.898 . 10−3 X ( 70 − X )
Y = 0.343X − 4.898 . 10−3 X2
35
∫ MydX = ∫ (53.93X − X2 ) (0.343X −4.898 × 10−3 X2 ) dX
o
190 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
50
+ ∫ (−16.07X + 1225) (0.343X − 4.898 × 10−3 X2
) dX
35
70
+ ∫ ( −21.07X + 1475 ) (0.343X −4.898 × 10−3 X2 ) dX Multiply the expressions
50
35
= ∫ (18.498X2 − 0.264X3 − 0.343X3 + 4.898 × 10−3 X4 ) dX
o
50
+ ∫ (−5.512X2 + 0.079X3 + 420.175X − 6X2 ) dX
35
70
+ ∫ (−7.227X2 + 0.103X3 + 505.925X − 7.225X2 ) dX re-arranging we get
50
35
= ∫ (4.898 × 10−3 X4 − 0.607X3 + 18.498X2 ) dX
o
50
+ ∫ (0.079X3 − 11.512 X2 + 420.175 X) dX
35
70
+ ∫ (0.103X3 − 14.452X2 + 505.925X) dX
50
5 4 35 50
X3 X4 X3 X2
= 4.898 × 10-3 + 18.498 + 0.079 + 420.175
X X
− 0.607 − 11.512
5 4 3 o 4 3 2 35
70
X4 X3 X2
+ 0.103 − 14.452 + 505.925 . Insert limits and simplify
4 3 2 50
H = 107.34 KN
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 191
∫ MydX
H =
∫ y2dX
21318.27 × 7
=
192.24 × 7
H = 110.89 KN Accuracy can be increased by increasing the number of
segments. Now BMD is drawn.
2Kn/m 5kN
20m
C
2KN/m 5KN
x C x 20m
6m D
y B
A 70M
D
53.93KN 21.07KN
R
R=105.08m
L2 yc
R = +
8yc 2
702 6
R = +
8X6 y
R = 105.08 m
dy −X
y = R2 − X2 − (h − yc) and = tan θ =
dX 105.082 − X2
y = 105.082 − X2 − (105.08 − 6 )
[ ]
20
+ ∫ 21.07 (35 − X) 105.082 − X2 − 99.08 dX
o
( Where I1 , I2 and I3 are 1st , 2nd and 3rd integrals of above expression respectively). These are
evaluated separately to avoid lengthy simultaneous evaluation of above ∫ My dX expression.
[ ]
35
= ∫ (662.55 + 16.07X − X2) 105.082 − X2 − 99.08 dX
o
[662.55
35
= ∫ 105.082 − X2 + 16.07 X 105.082 − X2
o
35 35
∫ XdX + 99.08 ∫ X2dX
o o
Put X = 105.08 Sinθ
and dX = 105.08 Cosθ dθ
At X = 0 , θ = 0
At X = 35 , θ = 0.3396 radians = 19.4°
0.3396
I1 = 662.55 ∫ 105.082 − 105.082 × Sin2 θ(105.08)Cosθdθ
o
353
(352 ) + 99.08
1592.216
− 65645.454 (35 − 0) −
2 3
0.3396
1+Cos θ dθ +1005048.922 + 11347550.55
2
I1 = 7315748.83 ∫
o 2
0.3396
1
− ∫ 105.084 Cos4 θdθ − 1856804.857
3o
Sin2 θ
0.3396
7315748.83 1
= θ+ − (105.08)4
2 2 o 3
0.3396
∫ Cos2 θ (1− Sin2 θ)dθ + 10495794.62
o
0.3396
1
+ × (105.08)4 (1 − Cos2 2θ) dθ
12 o
Sin (2 × 0.3396)
× (105.8)4 0.3396 +
1
= 12886893.66 −
6 2 ]
0.3396
+
1
× (105.08)4 ∫ 1 − 1 + Cos 4 θ dθ
12 o 2
0.3396
= 12886893.66 − 13283049.35 +
1
× (105.08)4 ∫ 1 − 1 Cos 4 θ dθ
12 o 2 2
0.3396
(105.08)4 θ −
1 Sin 4θ
= − 396155.69 +
24 4 o
Sin (4 × 0.3396)
0.3396
(105.08)4 0.3396 −
1
= − 396155.69 +
24 4 o
= − 396155.69 + 483712.6275
= 87556.9375
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 195
[ ]
20
I2 = ∫ 21.07 (35 − X) 105.082 − X2 − 99.08 dX
o
[ ]
20
= ∫ (737.45 − 21.07X) 105.082 − X2 − 99.08 dX
o
[737.45
20
= ∫ 105.082 − X2 − 73066.546
o
26 20
(−2X) dX − 73066.546 ∫ dX + 2087.616 ∫ XdX
o o
0.1915
1+Cos 2θ dθ + 21.07 (105.08) − X
2 2 3/2 20
= 8.143 × 106 ∫
o 2 2 3/2 o
26 20
X2
− 73066.546 | X | + 2087.616
o 2 o
8.143 × 106
0.1915
Sin 2θ 21.07
=
2 θ + 2 o +
3
[{(105.08)2 − (20)2}3/2 − (105.08)2x3/2 ]
2087.616
− 73066.546 (20) + (400 )
2
[ ] dX
35
I3 = ∫ (662.45 − 16.07X) 105.082 − X2 − 99.08
20
35
= ∫ [662.45 105.082 − X2 − 65635.546
20
0.3396 35
= 662.45 ∫ 105.082 Cos2 θ dθ − 65635.546 | X |
0.1915 20
35 35
X2
+ 1592.216 +
16.07
∫ 105.082 − X2 (−2X) dX
2 20 2 20
0.3396
= 662.45 × 105.082 ∫ 1 + Cos 2 θ dθ − 65635.546 × 15
0.1915 2
1592.216 16.07
+ (352 − 202) + [(105.082 − 352 )3/2 − (105.082 − 202 )3/2 ]
2 3
[ ] dX
35 2
∫y2 dX = 2 ∫ 105.082 − X2 − 99.08
o
35
= 2 ∫ (20858.653 − X2 − 198.16 105.082 − X2 ) dX
o
35 0.3396
2 3 35
= 2 × 20858.653 | X | − | X | − 198.16 × 2 ∫ 105.082 Cos2 θ dθ
o 3 o
0.3396
1+Cos θ dθ
2
2
= 2 × 20858.653 (35) − (353 ) − 198.16 × 2 × 105.082 ∫
3 o 2
198.16 × 2 × 105.082
0.3396
2 Sin 2θ
= 2 × 20858.653 × 35 − + 353 − θ+
3 2 2 o
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES 197
∫y2d X = 1229.761
∫MydX
H =
∫y2dX
154642.3505
=
1239.761
H = 125.75 KN
53.93KN 21.07KN
y = 105.082 − X2 − 99.08
Mac = 53.93 (35 − X) − (35 − X) 20 < X < 35
Mbd = 21.07 (35 − X) 0 < X < 20
Mdc = 21.07 (35 − X) − 5 (15 − X) 29 < X < 35
Attempting in a tabular form
Section X Y M MY Y2
1 31.5 1.167 176.505 205.981 1.362
2 24.5 3.104 456.015 1415.47 9.635
3 17.5 0.533 637.525 2889.901 20.548
4 10.5 5.474 721.035 3946.446 29.965
5 3.5 5.942 760.545 4198.29 35.307
6 3.5 5.942 606.205 3602.07 35.307
7 10.5 5.474 493.715 2702.596 29.965
8 17.5 4.533 368.725 1671.430 20.548
9 24.5 3.104 221.235 686.713 9.635
10 31.5 1.167 73.745 86.060 1.362
∑21405.157 ∑193.634
198 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
For secant variation of inertia follow the same procedures established already in this
Chapter.
CHAPTER FOUR
4. SLOPE – DEFLECTION METHOD
This method is applicable to all types of statically indeterminate beams & frames and in this
method, we solve for unknown joint rotations, which are expressed in terms of the applied loads and the
bending moments. By inspection, the degree of indeterminacy is checked and the corresponding number of
unknown joint rotations are calculated from the slope – deflections equations.
4.2. PROCEDURE:–
The procedure is as follows:
(1) Determine the fixed end moments at the end of each span due to applied loads acting on span by
considering each span as fixed ended. Assign ± Signs w.r.t. above sign convention.
w (u.d.l)
2 2
+WL
____ A B -WL
____
12 L 12
+WL2 -WL2
Mf ab = ____ MFba = ____
12 12
P
a b
A B
L
2 2
Mf ab =
+ Pa b MFba = -____
Pa b
2 2
L L
(2) Express all end moments in terms of fixed end moments and the joint rotations by using slope –
deflection equations.
(3) Establish simultaneous equations with the joint rotations as the unknowns by applying the
condition that sum of the end moments acting on the ends of the two members meeting at a joint
should be equal to zero.
(4) Solve for unknown joint rotations.
(5) Substitute back the end rotations in slope – deflection equations and compute the end moments.
(6) Determine all reactions and draw S.F. and B.M. diagrams and also sketch the elastic curve
200 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
(i) (ii)
Fig: (i) can be equated to a fixed ended beam carrying applied loads which produce fixing
moments plus two simple beams carrying end moments [figs (iii) and (iv)]
(iii) (iv)
Draw moment diagrams. Determine their areas and centroid locations.
M
(Assuming these diagrams are placed on conjugate beams)
EI
Equating relevant rotations in above four diagrams according to sign conventions
Where Ma′ and Mb′ are the additional moments required to produce the joint rotations at ends A
and B respectively and Mfab & Mfba are the fixed ended moments which hold the tangents at points A and
B straight.Conjugate beam theorem states that “ rotation at a point in actual beam is equal to the shear force
at the corresponding point in the conjugate beam ). Applying it we have.
2 LMa′ LMa′
θa1 = =
3 2EI 3EI
1 LMa′ LMa′
θb1 = =
3 2EI 6EI
1 LMb′ LMb′
θa2 = =
3 2EI 6EI
2 LMb′ LMb′
θb2 = =
3 2EI 3EI
Putting the values of θa1, θa2, θb1 & θb2 in equation (1) and solve for Ma′ & Mb′.
LMa' LMb'
Equation (3) becomes θa + = OR
3EI 6EI
6EI
Mb′ = θa + 2 Ma′ → (5)
L
Ma ′L L 6EIθa + 2Ma'
From (4), θb = − by putting Mb/ from (5)
6EI 3EI L
Ma ′L 2LMa′
θb = − 2 θa −
6EI 3EI
Ma ′L 2LMa′
θb + 2 θa = −
6EI 3EI
Ma′L − 4 LMa′
θb + 2θa =
6EI
202 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
− 3LMa′
θb + 2θa =
6EI
− LMa′
So θb + 2θa = From here Ma' is
2EI
− 2EI
Ma′ = (2θa + θb )
L
2EI
or Ma′ = ( − 2θa − θb) → (6)
L
6EI θa 4EI
From(5) Mb′ = + (− 2 θa − θb ) By putting value of Ma’ from 6 in 5 and simplifying
L L
− 2EI θa 4EI
Mb′ = − θb
L L
2EI
or Mb′ = (− θa − 2 θb ) → (7)
L
Putting the values of Ma′ and Mb′ from equations 6 and 7 in equation (2), we have.
2EI
Mab = Mfab + (− 2θa−θb)
L
2EI
Mba = Mfba + (−θa− 2θb)
L
2EI
Absolute values of are not required in general except for special cases and we use relative
L
2EI
values of in cases without settlement..
L
I
Where, K = if absolute stiffness (rotation) is not required.
L
2EI
Mba = Mfba + (− 2 θb − θa )
L
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 203
2EI
without absolute value of , above equations become
L
2EIab
Kab =
L
Now we apply the method to various indeterminate structures.
EXAMPLE NO.1::− Analyze the continuous beam shown by slope − deflection method. Draw shear &
moment diagram and sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :−
2KN 2KN/m 4KN
1m 2m
A B C D
2I 4I 3I
4m 6m 4m
I
Member. I L Krel.
L
2
AB 2 4 × 12 6
4
4
BC 4 6 × 12 8
6
3
CD 3 4 × 12 9
4
Step 2: Calculation of Fixed End Moments :− Treat each span as fixed ended.
P
a b - (any generalized span
L carrying a single load)
Pb2a 2
Pa b
L2 L2
– 12 θa – 6 θb – 2 = 0
– 6 θa – 28 θb – 8 θc + 6 = 0 ( Symmetrical about θa and θd diagonal )
0 – 8 θb – 34 θc – 9 θd – 4 = 0
0 −0 – 9 θc – 18 θd– 2 = 0
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 205
If the linear simultaneous equations are established and are arranged in a sequence of joint
conditions, we will find that the quantities on the leading diagonal are dominant in that particular equation
and off diagonal quantities are symmetrical as far as the magnitude of rotations is concerned. This is a
typical property of the stiffness method, which you will study later in matrix methods of structural analysis.
Putting these values in equations (2) & (3), all deformations are expressed in terms of θb & θc.
Therefore, we get two linear simultaneous equations in terms of θb & θc. Hence, their values can be
calculated.
–6
–2 – 6θb
– 28 θb – 8 θc + 6 = 0
12
+ 1 + 3 θb – 28 θb – 8 θc + 6 = 0
or – 25 θb – 8 θc + 7 = 0 → (7)
– 2 – 9 θc
– 8 θb – 34 θc – 9 – 4 =0 Simplifying
18
– 8 θb – 34 θc + 1 + 4.5 θc – 4 = 0
– 8 θb – 29.5 θc – 3 = 0 → (8)
– 8 θc + 7
–8
Put in (8)
25 – 29.5 θc – 3 = 0
– 26.94 θc – 5.24 = 0
–5.24
θc =
26.94
θc = – 0.1945 Radians
206 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
θb =
–8 ( – 0.1945) + 7
25
θb = + 0.3422 radians.
–2 – 6 × 0.3422
θa =
12
θa = – 0.3378 radians.
–2 – 9 . (– 0.1945)
θd =
18
θd = – 0.0139 radians.
Putting these values of rotations in simultaneous equations set up in step (3) & simplifying we get
the values of end moments as under:
As the end moments have been calculated and they also satisfy the joint conditions, therefore, the
structure is statically determinate at this stage. Reactions, shear force diagrams, B.M. diagrams & elastic
curves can now be sketched.
NOTE:–
In slope – deflection method, the actual deformations are the redundants and stiffness matrix is
symmetrical. In force – method, we can chose any redundant and therefore flexibility matrix is not
generally symmetrical about leading diagonal.
Now we can draw shear force and bending moment diagrams and sketch elastic curve. Free body diagrams
of various spans are drawn.
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 207
-0.02 +0.02 -0.592 +0.592 +1.408 -1.408 reactions due to end moments
+2 -0.02 +0.02 +5.408 +6.592 + 3.408 +0.592
adding values on both sides of a support
A 4m B 6m C 4m D
5.63
a=1.652m
Find the location of points of contraflexure & find the maximum +ve B. M. in portion BC by
setting the relevant moment expression equal to zero and by setting the concerned S.F. expression equal to
zero respectively.
X = 2.704m
208 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
2
So Mbc = – 2.08 + 5.408 × 2.704 – × (2.704)
2
Points of Contraflexure :–
Near B:–
– 2.08 + 5.408 X – X2 = 0
X2 – 5.408 X + 2.08 = 0
X = 0.417 m, 4.991 m
X = 0.417 m
Near C :– In span CB
– 5.63 + 6.592 X' – X'2 = 0
X′2 – 6.592 X′ + 5.63 = 0
6.592 ± 4.575
X′ =
2
X′ = 5.584 , 1.008
X′ = 1.008 m
1.184 5.63
= in span CD.
2−a a
a = 1.652 m
These can be put in bending moment diagram and sketch elastic curve.
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 209
EXAMPLE NO. 2:– Analyse the continuous beam shown by slope –deflection method. Draw S.F.D. &
B.M.D. Also sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :–
4KN
A 2m 2m B
C
6m
EI = Constt. EI = Constt.
Step 1: Calculation of Relative Stiffness :–
I
Member I L Krel.
L
1
AB 1 4 × 12 3
4
1
BC 1 6 × 12 2
6
Step 2: Calculation of Fixed End Moments :– Mab = Mfab + Krel (−2ba − θb)
4 × 22 × 2
Mfab = = + 2 KN–m
42
Mfba = – 2 KN–m
Mfbc = 0
Mfcb = 0 ( As there is no load in portion BC )
Putting these joint conditions in the linear simultaneous equations set up in step No. (3)
Put θa = θc = 0 in above equations. The only equation is obtained from joint B. That becomes.
– 2 – 6 θb – 3 θa – 4 θb – 2 θc = 0
– 2 – 6 θb – 0 – 4 θb – 0 = 0
– 2 – 10 θb = 0
θb = – 0.2 radians.
210 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Put these values of rotations i.e., θa = θc = 0 and θb = −0.2 in simultaneous equations set up in
step (3) & get the values of end moments.
Mab = 2 + 3 ( – 2 × 0 + 0.2) = 2.6 KN–m
Mba = – 2 + 3 (– 2 × (– 0.2) – 0) = – 0.8 KN–m.
Mbc = 0 + 2 [ – 2 × (–0.2) – 0] = + 0.8 KN–m
Mcb = 0 + 2 ( 0 + 0.2) = + 0.4 KN–m . Now Draw SFD and BMD.
4KN 0.4KN-m
2m 2m
A C
B 6m
2.6KN-m
1.75KN
2.45KN 0.2KN
2.45 2.45
+ 0.2 0.2
+
0 0 S.F.D.
1.55 1.55
2.3
X=1.061m
+ 0.4
+
0 B.M.D.
(2-X)
(2-X)
X 0.8
(6-a) a=2m
2.6 =0.516m
As the end moments have been calculated and they satisfy the joint conditions, therefore, the structure is
statically determinate at this stage. Reactions, S.F. diagram, B.M. diagram & elastic curve have now been
sketched.
X = 1.061 m
X′ 2– X′
Near B :– =
0.8 2.3
2.3 X′ = 2 × 0.8 – 0.8 X′
X′ = 0.516 m
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 211
=
a 6 – a
Near C :−
0.4 0.8
EXAMPLE NO. 3:– Analyze the continuous beam shown by slope – deflection method. Draw S.F.D &
B.M.D. Also sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION:–
A B C D
1m 4m 6m 4m
2I 4I 3I
I
Member. I L Krel.
L
2
AB 2 4 × 12 6
4
4
BC 4 6 × 12 8
6
3
CD 3 4 × 12 9
4
Mfcb = – 6 KN–m
4 × 22 × 2
Mfcd = = + 2 KN–m
42
Mfdc = –2 KN–m
212 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Step 3: Establish simultaneous equations :– Put values of fixing moments and Krel.
Mab = 0 + 6 (–2 θa – θb) = – 12 θa – 6 θb
Mba = 0 + 6 ( – 2 θb – θa ) = – 12 θb – 6 θa
Mbc = 6 + 8 ( – 2 θb – θc) = 6 – 16 θb – 8 θc
Mcb = – 6 + 8 ( – 2 θc – θb) = – 6 – 16 θc – 8 θb
Mcd = 2 + 9 ( – 2 θc – θd) 2 – 18 θc – 9 θd
Mdc = – 2 + 9 (– 2 θd – θc) = – 2 – 18 θd – 9 θc
– 12 θa – 6 θb = 2 ∴ Mab = 2
– 12 θa – 6 θb – 2 = 0 → (1)
Mba + Mbc = 0
– 12 θb – 6 θa + 6 – 16 θb – 8 θc = 0
– 6 θa – 28 θb – 8 θc + 6 = 0 → (2)
Mcb + Mcd = 0
– 6 – 16 θc – 8 θb + 2 – 18 θc – 9 θd = 0
– 8 θb – 34 θc – 9 θd – 4 = 0 → (3)
– 12 θa – 6 θb – 2 = 0 → (1)
– 6 θa – 28 θb – 8 θc + 6 = 0 → (2)
– 8 θb – 34 θc – 9 θd – 4 = 0 → (3)
θd =0 → (4)
– 8θb – 34 θc – 0 – 4 = 0
– 8 θb – 34 θc – 4 = 0 → (5)
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 213
– 6 θb – 2
From (1) θa = → (6)
12
– 6 θb – 2
–6
Put in (2)
12 – 28 θb – 8 θc + 6 = 0
+ 3 θb + 1 – 28 θb – 8 θc + 6 = 0
– 25 θb – 8 θc + 7 = 0 → (7)
–34 θc – 4
From (5) θb = → (8)
8
–34 θc – 4
– 25
Put in (7)
8 – 8 θc + 7 = 0
or 106.25 θc + 12.5 – 8 θc + 7 = 0
98.25 θc + 19.5 = 0
θc = – 0.1985 radians.
θb =
–34 (– 0.1985) – 4
From (8) by putting value of θc
8
θa =
– 6 x 0.3435 – 2
From (6)
12
θb = + 0.3435 radians.
θa = – 0.3384 radians.
Finally θa = – 0.3384
θb = + 0.3435
θc = – 0.1985
θd = 0
Putting these values of rotations in simultaneous equations set up in step # (3) & getting the values
of end moments as follows.
Mab = –12x (–0.3384) – 6 × 0..3435 = 1.9918 = + 2 KN–m
Mba = – 12x (+0.3435)– 6x(– 0.3384) = – 2.092 KN–m
Mbc = 6 – 16(+0.3435)–8 (– 0.1985) = + 2.092 KN–m
Mcb = – 6 – 16(– 0.1985) – 8(+0.3435) = – 5.572 KN–m
Mcd = 2 – 18 (– 0.1985) – 9 × 0 = + 5.573 KN–m
Mdc = – 2 – 18 x 0 – 9 (– 0.1985) = – 0.214 KN–m.
214 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
As the end moments have been calculated and they satisfy the joint conditions. Therefore, the
structure is statically determinate at this stage. Reactions, S.F.D., B.M.D. & elastic curve can now be
sketched.
5.42 3.34
(6-a) +
+ 0 S.F.D.
0 -
- - 0.66
2 0.023 0.023
a
5.25
X X 1.106
X X
+ B.M.D.
+ 0
0
- -
2
2.092
5.572
5.42 6.58
=
a (6 − a)
Near B :– (Span BC )
– 2.092 + 5.42 X – X2 = 0
X2 – 5.42 X + 2.092 = 0
5.42 ± 4.583
X =
2
Near C :– Span BC
6.58 ± 4.583
=
2
Near C : ( Span CD )
X" = 1.669 m
Near D :– ( Span CD )
0.214 + 0.66 X = 0
X = 0.324 m
R= B
L R
Consider a generalized fixed ended beam settling differentially at B. The angle R is measured
from the original members axis to the displaced member axis and will be +ve if it is clockwise. The
2EI
absolute values of with consistent units are to be used in the settlement problem and the final slope –
L
deflection equation to be used for settlement problems is as follows:–
2EI
Mab = Mfab + (– 2 θa – θb + 3 R)
L
2EI
Mba = Mfba + (– 2 θb – θa + 3 R).
L
The above equation is general and can be used to find the end moments due to applied loading and
due to sinking of supports simultaneously. However, it is a common practice to consider end moments
induced due to applied loading separately from those induced due to settlement. The superposition principle
can then be applied afterwards and the final end moments can be obtained.
If all supports of a continuous structure like beams and frames settle by the same amount, no
additional end moments will be induced due to sinking. These will be induced only whenever there is a
differential sinking of supports like the following case. Where support C sinks by ∆ w.r.t supports B and D.
A B L1 C L2 D
R R
R R
/
C
∆
Rbc = ( Clock–wise angle is positive )
L1
∆
Rcd = – ( Counterclock–wise angle is negative )
L2
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 217
EXAMPLE NO. 4:– Analyze the continuous beam shown due to the settlement of support B by slope-
deflection method. Draw shear and moment diagrams and sketch the elastic curve.
A B C
D
I=400X10-4m4
/
B
1m 4m 5m 4m
2I 4I 3I
SOLUTION:–
Step 1: Calculation of F.E.M :–
2EI
Mab = Mfab + (– 2 θa – θb + 3 R). where R is in radians
L
As there is no applied loading on the beam, therefore all fixed end moments terms in the slope –
deflection equation will be equal to zero.
2EI
Step 2: Calculation of R and terms for various spans :–
L
Span AB.
0.015
R=+ = + 3.75 × 10–3 rad
4
= 80,000 KN–m
Span BC :–
0.015
R=– = – 3 × 10–3 rad
5
= 128,000 KN–m
218 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Span CD :–
R=0
2EI 2x (200 × 106) × (3 × 400 × 10–6)
=
L 4
= 120,000 KN–m
Solve the above three linear simultaneous equations to get the values of θa, θb & θc which will be
put in the original slope–deflection equations to determine the final end moments.
–128000 θb – 1152
From (3) θc =
496000
–405.04
θb =
342976
Step 6: End Moments :– Putting values of rotations in generalized slope – deflection equation.
Mab = 80,000 (–2 × 6.215 × 10–3+1.181 × 10–3 + 11.25 × 10–3) = 0 KN−m (Check)
Mba = 80,000 (+2 × 1.181 × 10–3 – 6.215 × 10–3 + 11.25 × 10–3) = + 592 KN–m
Mcb = 128,000 (+2 × 2.018 × 10–3 + 1.181 × 10–3 – 9 × 10–3) = – 485 KN–m
Note:- A great care should be exercised while putting the direction of end moments in the free body
diagrams and then drawing the composite B.M.D. e.g., a (+ve) end moment would mean that
it is counterclockwise at that particular joint or vice versa. After putting the correct
directions according to the sign convention, we will decide by the nature of B.M. strictly by
keeping in view the sign convention for B.M. (tension at a bottom means +ve B.M.).
A 4m B B 5m C C 4m D
Reactions due to
+148 -148 -215.4 +215.4 +181.75 -181.75 and moments at supports
148KN 363.4KN 397.15KN 181.75KN Final reaction
242KN-m
A B C D
Elastic curve
15mm
397.15KN
148KN 181.75KN
1m 4m 5m 4m
363.4KN
181.75 `81.75
148 148
+ + +
0 0 S.F.D. (KN)
-
215.4
592(tension at the X
bottom).
+ 242
+ +
0 0 B.M.D. (KN-m)
-
X=2.75m
POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES:–
Near B. Span BC
Let it be X.
MX = 592 – 215.4 X = 0
X = 2.75 m
Near D. Span DC
Let it be X′
MX′ = 242 – 181.75 X′ = 0
X′= 1.33 m
EXAMPLE NO. 5:- Analyze the following beam by slope – deflection method. Draw shear and moment
diagrams. Sketch elastic curve.
3I 10I 2I
6m 8m 8m
3KN/m
A B
6m
10KN
B 4m 4m
C
5KN
C D
6m 2m
222 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
SPAN BC :–
– 0.02 0.01
R = + = – 1.25 × 10–3 rad
8 8
SPAN CD:–
– 0.01
R = = –1.25 × 10–3 rad
8
51 – 200000 θc
From (1) θb = → (4)
560000
51 – 200000 θc
Put θb and θd in equ. – 200,000
(2)
560000 – 480,000 θc
Step 7: SUPPORT REACTIONS:– By applying loads and end moments on free-body diagrams.
3KN/m
10KN 5KN
651.64KN-m 60.71KN-m
739.32 651.64KN 4m 2m
60.71KN-m
A BB -m CC D
6m 8m 8m
3.84
84.04 8.84
222.83 =+1.25+7.59 =+3.75-7.59
240 =+5-89.04 94.04
=+9+231.83 =+9-231.83 =89.04+5
Net reactions, shear force and bending moment diagrams can now be plotted
Step 8: S.F & B.M. DIAGRAMS & ELASTIC CURVE :–
3KN/m
739.32KN-m 10KN 5KN
651.64KN-m
4m 60.71KN-m 2m
A D Elastic curve
C
-222.83 -84.04 94.04 +8.84
240.83KN 20mm 3.84KN
31 B 101 102.88Kn
21
6m 8m 8m
306.87KN
240.83 222.83
+ 8.84
3.84
+ + +
0 0 S.F.D. (KN).
84.04 -
94.04
651.64
X=3.13m /
X = 0.646 m
+
+
0 - - 0 B.M.D. (KN-m)
60.71
739.32
EXAMPLE NO.6:– Analyze the continuous beam shown due to settlement of support B by slope–
deflection method. Draw S.F. & B.M. diagrams & sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION –
3KN/m 24KN 12KN
A B C
2.5 m 1m
D
1m 4m 5mm 5m 4m E=200X106
2I 4I 3I KN/m2
4
I = 400X10 -6m
B
3KN/m
A B
4m
24KN
B C
2.5m 2.5m
12KN
3m 1m
C D
2EI
Step2: CALCULATION OF R & TERMS FOR VARIOUS SPANS:–
L
Span AB :–
0.015
R=+ = 3.75 × 10–3 rad
4
Span BC :–
0.015
R=– = – 3 × 10–3 rad.
5
Span CD :–
R=0
2EI 2 × (200 × 106) (3 × 400 × 10–6)
=
L 4
= 120,000 KN–m
–1164.75–128000 θb
From (3) θc = → (5)
496000
Now plot SFD, BMD and sketch elastic curve by applying loads and end moments to
free-body diagram.
A 4m B B 5m C C 4m D
+145.25 -145.25 -215.2 +215.2 +183.75 -183.75 reaction due to end moments (KN)
+6 +6 +12 +12 +3 +9 reaction due to applied loads (KN)
-342.45 +413.95
Note: Reactions due to loads and end moments have been calculated separately and then added up
appropriately.
3KN/m 24KN 12KN
2.5m 1m
A B C
D Elastic curve.
174.75
139.25 186.75 174.75KN
151.25 + +
+ 0 S.F.D. (KN)
0
203.2 227.2
227.2
581 1.37m
/
X = 1.37 m
+
+ +
0 240
X
B.M.D. (KN-M)
=2.86m 995
POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES :–
Near B :– Span AB
Let it be ‘X’
MX = 581 – 203.2 X = 0
X = 2.86 m
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 229
Near D :– Span CD
Let it be X′
Mx′ = 240 – 174.75 X′ = 0
X′ = 1.37 m These have been shown on BMD.
EXAMPLE NO. 7:– Analyze the continuous beam shown due to the settlement of support B alone by
slope–deflection method. Draw S.F. & B.M. diagrams & sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :–
A B C D
As there is no applied loading on the beam, therefore, all fixed end moment terms in the slope–
deflection equation will be equal to zero.
2EI
Step 2: CALCULATION OF R AND TERMS FOR VARIOUS SPANS
L
Span AB :–
0.015
R=+ = + 3.75 × 10–3 rad.
4
Span BC :–
0.015
R=– = – 3 × 10–3 rad.
5
Span CD :–
R=0 rad. (Both points C and D are at the same level)
(Mcb + Mcd = 0)
– 256,000 θc – 128,000 θb – 1152 – 240,000 θc – 120,000 θd = 0
– 128,000 θb – 496,000 θc – 120,000 θd – 1152=0 → (3)
(Mdc = 0)
– 240,000 θd – 120,000 θc = 0
– 120,000 θc – 240,000 θd = 0 → (4)
Re-writing
– 160,000 θa – 80,000 θb + 0 + 0 + 900 = 0 → (1)
– 80,000 θa – 416.000 θb – 128,000 θc + 0 – 252 = 0 → (2)
0 – 128,000 θb – 496,000 θc–120,000 θd–1152 = 0 → (3)
0 + 0 – 120,000 θc – 240,000 θd + 0 = 0 → (4)
From (7)
–702 – 128000 θc
θb = → (9)
376000
from (6)
θd = – 0.5 (– 2.327 × 10–3)
θd = + 1.164 × 10–3 rad.
Final values of end rotations are:
θa = + 6.162 × 10–3 rad.
θb = – 1.075 × 10–3 rad.
θc = – 2.327 × 10–3 rad.
θd = + 1.164 × 10–3 rad.
232 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
A 4m B B 5m C C 4m D
Reaction due to
+144.75 -144.75 -199.6 +199.6 +104.75 -104.75 end moments
A B C D
104.75KN
304.35KN
144.75KN
344.35KN
1m 4m 5m 4m
144.75 104.75
144.75 104.75
+ + +
0 S.F.D. (KN)
199.6
579 199.6
+
+
0 B.M.D. (KN-m)
X=2.9m
419
Near B :– Span BC
Centre line
The side sway (relative displacement of two ends of a column) or the horizontal movement of the
structure may become obvious once the structure and the loading is inspected in terms of inertia, E values and
support conditions etc. However, following are the rules and guide lines which may be followed for deciding
whether side sway is present or not.
(1) In case of symmetrical frames subjected to symmetrical loading, the side sway may
be neglected for columns having equal inertia values if support conditions are same.
“An unsymmetrical frame is that which has columns of unequal lengths and different end conditions
and moment of inertia the load may be symmetrical or unsymmetrical.”
4.7. STIFFNESS :–
“Stiffness can be defined as the resistance towards deformation which is a material, sectional and
support parameter.” More is the stiffness, less is the deformation & vice versa. Stiffness attracts loads /
stresses.
EXAMPLE NO. 8:– Analyze the rigid frame shown by slope–deflection method.
10KN 2KN/m
2m 3m C
A B 2I
3I
4m
2I 3m
SOLUTION :– Examining loads and support conditions, horizontal moment is not possible.
Step 1: Relative Stiffness :–
I
Member I L Krel.
L
3
AB 3 5 × 30 18
5
2
BC 2 4 × 30 15
4
2
BD 2 3 × 30 20
3
2KN/m
B C
4m
– 212 θb – 30 θc – 4..26 = 0
15 θb 30 θc 2.67 = 0
– 197 θb – 1.59 = 0
10KN 2 KN/m
7.345 4.509 4.187
0.16
A 2m 3m
B B C
8.48 4m
+6 +4 +4 +4
0.33
+0.57 -0.57 +1.05 -1.05
B
6.57 3.44 0.16 5.05 2.95
3m
0.16
D
0.161
8.48
7.345KN 10KN 2KN/m
4.187KN-m
A 2m 3m B B C
4m
6.57KN 2.96KN
5.05KN
3.43KN
4.509 KN-m
Vx=2.96-2X=0
x=2.96-2x=0
Mx=2.96x1.48 5.04 1.48
6.57 6.57 -1.48 X= S.F.D. (KN)
S.F.D. (KN) + + =2.190W-m +
0 +
0 - 0 0
3.43 -
3.43
Point of contraflexure 2.96
X=1.12M Mx=2.96x-x=0
5.795
X(2.96-X)=0
X=1.12m X=1.31m 2.190
+ Mx=4.509x3.43Either x=0
+ B.M.D. (KN-m)
B.M.D. (KN-m) 0 + +
0 0
4.509 - X
7.34
X=1.31m 4.187 =2.96m
B.M.D. (KN-m)
0 S.F.D. (KN)
0.323KN-m
0.16KN
0.323
0.16
+
+
0
D
+
3m
0.16KN
0.161KN-m
X=1m
B
0
0.161
0
0.16
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 237
6.57
5.04
+ 0.16 C
A B
3.43 0.43
2.96
S.F.D.
5.795
2.19
+ 0.523 B + C
A -
4.5 4.187
7.345
B.M.D.
ELASTIC CURVE D
EXAMPLE NO. 9:– Analyze the rigid frame shown by slope–deflection method
10KN
B 2m 2m C
2I 3I
1.5m
5KN
2I 1.5m
A
238 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
SOLUTION:– Inspecting loads and support conditions, horizontal displacement is not possible.
5 × 1.52 × 1.5
Mfab = = + 1.875 KN–m
32
10 × 22 × 2
Mfbc = = + 5 KN–m
42
Mfcb = – 5 KN–m
10KN 5.827
3.346
3.235 2m 2m 3.235
+5 +5
-0.620 +0.620
4.380 KN 5.62 KN
4.38
3.346
+2.5
+0.735
1.5m
3.235 KN
5KN
1.5m
+2.5
1.140 -0.735
1.765 KN
4.38
S.F.D BMD
4.38
5.414
+
B C
+
3.235 1
1 5.62 3.346 5.827
3.346
1.765 A 1.14
C
B
2I L3
Rab =
L1 L2
4I I Rcd
P Rab
Rcd =
L2
L1
Hd
HA D
A
EXAMPLE NO. 10:– Analyze the rigid frame shown by slope–deflection method.
5KN
B 2m 5m C
4I
3m I I 3m
A D
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 241
SOLUTION:–
Step 1: Relative Stiffness :–
I
Member I L Krel.
L
1
AB 1 3 × 21 7
3
4
BC 4 7 × 21 12
7
1
CD 1 3 × 21 7
3
Step 2: Relative Values of R :–
∆
Rab = Rcd = = Rrel or R (columns are of 3m length)
3
Mab = Mfab + Krelab (– 2 θa – θb + Rrel)
Mba = Mfba + Krelab (– 2 θb – θa + Rrel)
Other expressions can be written on similar lines.
NOTE :– In case of side sway, R values are obtained for columns only because the columns are supposed
to prevent (resist) side sway not beams.
5 × 52 × 2
Mfbc = = 5.10 KN–m
72
−5 × 22 × 5
Mfcb = = – 2.04 KN–m
72
All other F.E.M. are zero because there are no loads on other Spans.
Step 4: Slope – deflection Equations :– Putting values of FEM’s while R will now appear as unknown.
Mab = 0 + 7 (– 2θa – θb + R)
Mba = 0 + 7 (– 2 θb – θa + R)
Mbc = 5.1 + 12 (– 2 θb – θc)
Mcb = – 2.04 + 12 ( – 2 θc – θb)
Mcd = 0 + 7 (– 2 θc – θd + R)
Mdc = 0 + 7 (– 2 θd – θc + R)
242 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Mba Mcd
B C
3m 3m
NOTE: Shear forces are in agreement with direction of ∆. The couple constituted by shears is balanced by
the direction of end moments. (Reactive horizontal forces constitute a couple in opposite direction to that of
end momens).
∑ Fx = 0
Ha + Hd = 0
Write in terms of moments.
Mab + Mba + Mdc + Mcd = 0 → (3)
Apply equations (1), (2) & (3) and solve for θb, θc & R. Equation (3) is also called shear condition.
Step 7: Simultaneous Equations :–
Put θa and θd equal to zero in joint conditions for B and C in terms of end moments.
Mba + Mbc = 0
so – 14 θb + 7 R + 5.1 – 24 θb – 12 θc = 0 → (1)
Mcb + Mcd = 0
– 38 θb – 12 θc + 7 R + 5.1 = 0
– 2.04 – 24 θc – 12 θb – 14 θc + 7 R = 0
or – 12 θb – 38 θc + 7 R – 2.04 = 0 → (2)
Mab + Mba + Mdc + Mcd = 0
– 7 θb + 7 R – 14 θb + 7 R – 7 θc + 7 R – 14 θc + 7R=0
– 21 θb – 21 θc + 28 R = 0
or – 3 θb – 3 θc + 4 R = 0 → (3)
re-writing the equations again.
– 38 θb – 12 θc + 7 R + 5.1 = 0 → (1)
– 12 θb – 38 θc + 7 R – 2.04 = 0 → (2)
– 3 θb – 3 θc + 4 R = 0 → (3)
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 243
– 26 θb + 26 θc + 7.14 = 0 → (4)
From (4)
26 θc + 7.14
θb = put in ( 5) and solve for θc
26
26 θc + 7.14
– 27 – 131 θc – 8.16 = 0 → (6)
26
– 27 θc – 7.415 – 131 θc – 8.16 = 0
– 158 θc – 15.575 = 0
θc = – 0.0986 rad.
– 26 × 0.0986 + 7.14
From (6), θb =
26
θb = + 0.1760 rad.
From (1)
– 38 (0.1760) – 12 (–0.0986)+7R+5.1 = 0
R = + 0.0580
So finally, we have.
∴ θa = 0
θb = + 0.1760
θc = – 0.0986
θd = 0
R = + 0.0580
END MOMENTS :–
Putting above values of rotations and R in slope deflection equations, we have.
Mab = 7 (0– 0.176 + 0.058) = – 0.826 KN–m
Mba = 7 (– 2 × 0.176 – 0 + 0.058) = – 2.059 KN–m
Mbc = 5.1 + 12 (– 2 × 0.176 + 0.0986) = + 2.059 KN–m
Mcb = – 2.04 + 12 (+ 2 × 0.0986 – 0.176) = – 1.786 KN–m
Mcd = 7 (+ 2 × 0.0986 – 0 + 0.058) = + 1.786 KN–m
Mdc = 7 ( 0 + 0.0986 + 0.058) = + 1.096 KN–m
Draw SFD , BMD and sketch elastic curve.
244 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
3m 3m
-0.962
1.096
A 0.826 D
3.6 1.39
5KN
2.059KN-m 1.786KN-m
B 2m 5m C
3.61KN
1.39KN
3.61 3.61
Mx=-2.059
+3.61X=0 +
X=0.57m S.F.D.
Mx=-1.786 1.39
/
+1.39X =0 1.39 0.962
/
X =1.28m
5.161
X=0.57m X=1.28m
+ 0.862
0 0 B.M.D.
1.786
2.059
0.962 KN
B.M.D.
2.059KN-m
2.059
0.962
Mx=0.826-0.962X=0
B
X=0.86 m
0.962 KN
X=0.86m
3m
0.826 kN-m
0.826
+
0
A
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 245
1.096KN-m
0 B.M.D.
0.961KN
D
1.096
0.961
0
+
3m
1.786KN-m
0.961KN
-
0.961
1.786
0
0
C
Super impositing member SFD’s and BMD’s.
5.161
2.059 + 1.786
3.61 C
B
+ 1.786
C 1
B 2.059
0.962 0.961 1
1
S.F.D. B.M.D.
1
+
0.862 + +
0.962
A D A D 1.096
SFD BMD
ELASTIC CURVE:-
246 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
EXAMPLE NO. 11:– Analyze the rigid frame shown by slope–deflection method.
20 KN
A B 2m
C
2I 2I
3m I
5m I I 5m
E
D F
7m 7m
SOLUTION:–
20 × 22 × 5
Mfbc = = + 18.16 KN–m
72
20 × 52 × 2
Mfcb = = – 20.41 KN–m
72
Mfad = Mfda = 0 |
Mfbe = Mfeb = 0 |
Mfab = Mfba = 0 | As there are no loads on these spans.
Mfcf = Mffc = 0 |
∆
Member ∆ L Rrel.
L
AB 0 7 0 0
BC 0 7 0 0
∆
AD ∆ 5 × 15 3R
5
∆
BE ∆ 3 × 15 5R
3
∆
CF ∆ 5 × 15 3R
5
Mab = 0 + 30 (– 2 θa – θb) = – 60 θa – 30 θb
Mba = 0 + 30 (– 2 θb – θa) = – 60 θb – 30 θa
Mbc = 8.16 + 30 (– 2 θb – θc) = 8.16 – 60 θb – 30 θc
Mcb = – 20.41 + 30(– 2 θc – θb) = – 20.41–60 θc–30 θb
Mad = 0 + 21 (– 2 θa – θd + 3 R) = – 42 θa + 63 R
Mda = 0 + 21 (– 2 θd – θa + 3 R) = – 21 θa + 63 R
Mbe = 0 + 35 (– 2 θb – θe + 5 R) = – 70 θb + 175 R
Meb = 0 + 35 (– 2 θe – θb + 5 R) = – 35 θb + 175 R
Mcf = 0 + 21 (– 2 θc – θf + 3 R) = – 42 θc + 63 R
Mfc = 0 + 21 (– 2 θf – θc + 3 R) = – 21 θc + 63 R
3m
5m E Meb 5m
Meb+Mbe Mfc+Mcf
He= Hf=
3 5
D Mda+Mad F
Hd=
5
Mda Mfc
∑ FX = 0
Hd + He + Hf = 0, Now put Hd, He and Hf in terms of end moments. We have
Mda + Mad Meb + Mbe Mfc + Mcf
+ + =0
5 3 5
Solve the above equations, find end moments and hence draw, S.F, B.M, elastic curse diagrams.
Solving aboving 4 equations, following values, are obtained.
θa = –0.024924, θb = 0.0806095, θc = –0.225801, R = –0.00196765.( use programmable calculator or
Gausian elimination)
Putting these values in step 4, nodal moments may be calculated as follows:
Mab = 0 + 30 (–2θa – θb) = –60θa – 30θb
= –60(–0.024924) –30 (0.0806095)
= 0.923 KN-m.
Mba = –60θb – 30θa = –60(.0806095) –30(–0.024924) = –4.089 KN-m.
Mbc = 8.16–60 (.0806095) –30 (–0.225801) = 10.097 KN-m.
Mcb = –20.41 – 60 (–.225801) –30 (0.0806095) = 0.928 KN-m.
Mad = –42 (–.024924) +63 (–.00196765) = 0.923 KN-m.
Mda = –21(–.024924) +63 (–.00196765) = 0.3994 KN-m.
Mbe = –70 (.0806095) +175 (–.00196765) = –5.987 KN-m.
Meb = –35(0.0806095) + 175 (–.00196765) = 3.166 KN-m.
Mef = –42(0.225801) +63 (–.001968) = –9.60 KN-m.
Mfc = –21 (–0.2258) +63 (–.00197) = 4.12 KN-m.
Hb HE
L1 L1
1 1
2
P2 B 2
E
2 2 L3
L2
HF
A F
Ha
∆ 1 – ∆2
Rbc = Red =
L1
∆2 ∆2
Rab = Ref =
L2 L3
If L1 = L3
∆2 ∆2
Then Rab = , Ref =
L2 L1
250 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Mcb Mde
P1 C D
L1 L1
Hb He Med+Mde
Mbc+Mcb He=
B Hb= E L1
L1
Mbc Med
P1-Hb-He=0
ΣFX = 0 Hb and He can be written in terms of end moments as above. Applied load upto Section-1-1.
4.9.2. SHEAR CONDITIONS FOR LOWER STOREY :–
Mba Mef
P2 B E
L2 L3
Mba+Mab Mef+Mfe
(P1 + P2) - Ha - Hf=0 A Ha= HF=
L2 F L3
Mab Mfe
ΣFX = 0 Applied shear is to be considered upto Section 2-2. To demonstrate the
application, let us solve the following question.
EXAMPLE NO. 12:- Analyze the following frame by slope – deflection method. Consider:
I = 500 × 10–6m4 ,
E = 200 × 106 KN/m2
It is a double story frame carrying gravity and lateral loads.
24KN/m
10KN C D
1
5I
1 24KN/m
6m 2I 2I
B 2
5I E
2
2I 6m
2I
8m
F
A
8m
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 251
SOLUTION :–
∆2 ∆2
Rab = × 24 Ref = × 24
8 6
Step 3: F.E.M :–
F.E.M.s are induced in beams only as no loads act within column heights.
24 × 82
Mfbe = Mfcd = = + 128 KN–m
12
Step 4: Slope – Deflection Equations :– Put values of FEM’s and R Values for columns.
MCB M DE
10
C D
Hc Hd
6m 6m
M BC M ED
B Hb E He
MBC+MCB MED+MDE
HB = HE =
6 6
ΣFX = 0, 10 – Hb –He =0 putting values of Hb and He interms of end moments and simplifying, we get.
60 – MBC – MCB – MED – MDE = 0 → (5)
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD 253
M BA M EF
B E
Hb He
8m 6m
Ha Hf
A F
MAB MFE
M AB+MBA MFE+MEF
HA = HF =
8 6
Σ FX = 0, 10 – Ha – Hf = 0
Putting the values of Ha and Hf in terms of end moments and simplifying, we get.
480 – 6 MAB – 6 MBA – 8 MFE – 8 MEF = 0 → (6)
Now we have got six equations and Six unknowns. (θb, θc, θd, θe, R1, R2)
EXAMPLE NO. 13:– Analyze the rigid frame shown by slope–deflection method.
SOLUTION: It is a double storey frame carrying gravity loads only. Because of difference in column
heights, it has become an unsymmetrical frame.
3 KN/m
1 D
C 1
5I
4m 2I 3 KN/m 2I 4m
2 E 2
B
5I
2I
2I 4m
5m F
A
5m
I
Member I L Krel
L
4
AB 2 5 × 10 8
5
2
BC 2 4 × 10 5
4
5
CD 5 5 × 10 10
5
2
DE 2 4 × 10 5
4
2
Ef 2 4 × 10 5
4
5
BE 5 5 × 10 10
5
Step 2: F.E.M :–
F.E.Ms. are induced in beams only as they carry u.d.l. No loads act within column
heights.
3 × 25
Mfbe = Mfcd = = + 6.25 KN–m
12
∆
Member ∆ L Krel
L
∆2
AB ∆2 5 × 20 4 R2
5
∆1 – ∆2
BC (∆1–∆2) 4 R1
4
CD 0 5 0 0
∆1 – ∆2
DE (∆1–∆2) 4 R1
4
∆2
EF ∆2 4 × 20 5 R2
4
BE 0 5 0 0
∆1 − ∆2
∆2 terms have been arbitrarily multiplied by 20 while has been taken equal to R1.
4
Step 4: SLOPE – DEFLECTION EQUATIONS :–
By putting FEM’s and Krel Values.
Mab = 0 + 8 (– 2 θa – θb + 4 R2) = – 8 θb + 32 R2
Mba = 0 + 8 (– 2 θb – θa + 4 R2) = – 16 θb + 32 R2
Mbc = 0 + 5 (– 2 θb – θc + R1) = – 10 θb – 5 θc + 5 R1
Mcb = 0 + 5 (– 2 θc – θb + R1) = – 10 θc – 5 θb + 5 R1
Mcd = 6.25 + 10 (– 2 θc – θd) = 6.25 – 20 θc – 10 θd
Mdc = – 6.25 + 10 (– 2 θd – θc) = – 6.25 – 20 θd – 10 θc
Mde = 0 + 5 (– 2 θd – θe + R1) = – 10 θd – 5 θe + 5 R1
Med = 0 + 5 (– 2 θe – θd + R1) = – 10 θe – 5 θd + 5 R1
Mef = 0 + 5 (– 2 θe – θf + 5 R2) = – 10 θe + 25 R2
Mfe = 0 + 5 (– 2 θf – θe + 5 R2) = – 5 θe + 25 R2
Mbe = 6.25 + 10 (– 2 θb – θe) = 6.25 – 20 θb – 10 θe
Meb = – 6.25 + 10 (– 2 θe – θb) = – 6.25 – 20 θe – 10 θb
Step 5: JOINT CONDITIONS :–
Mcb Mde
C D
Hc Hd
4m 4m
B Hb E He
Mbc Med
Mbc+Mcb
Hb=
4
Med+Mde
He=
4
MBA MEF
B E
4m
5m
F HF
A HA
MFE
MAB
Ha =
Mab + Mba Mfe+Mef
5 , Hf = 4 Simplify
CHAPTER FIVE
The moment-distribution method can be used to analyze all types of statically indeterminate
beams or rigid frames. Essentially it consists in solving the linear simultaneous equations that were
obtained in the slope-deflection method by successive approximations or moment distribution. Increased
number of cycles would result in more accuracy. However, for all academic purposes, three cycles may be
considered sufficient.
In order to develop the method, it will be helpful to consider the following problem. A propped
cantilever subjected to end moments.
Ma
A a B M EI = Constt, aa = rotation at end A due
b
to moment at A.
L
Ma
A B B.D.S. under redundant Ma, ba = rotation at B due
aa ba to moment at A.
Ma MaL
EI 2EI Ma Diagram Over Conjugate - beam
EI
+
0 0
+
ab bb Mb
B
B.D.S. under redundant Mb, ab = rotation at A due
0 0 to moment at B.
MbL
2EI
Mb
EI (
Mb
EI
Diagram Over Conjugate - beam )bb = rotation at B due
to moment at B.
Note: Counterclockwise moment are considered (+ve)
Geometry requirement at B :−
θb = 0, or θba − θbb = 0 and (1) θb = θba − θbb =0 (Slope at B).
Now calculate all rotations shown in diagram by using conjugate beam method.
MaL × 2 L
2EI 3
θaa = ( By conjugate beam theorem)
L
MaL
θaa =
3EI
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 259
MbL × L
2EI 3
θab = ( By conjugate beam theorem)
L
MbL
θab =
6EI
MaL × L
2EI 3
θba = ( By conjugate beam theorem)
L
MaL
θba =
6EI
MbL × 2L
2EI 3
θbb = ( By conjugate beam theorem)
L
MbL
θbb =
3EI
Ma
or Mb = (3)
2
Ma.L Ma.L Ma
= − (by putting Mb = for above)
3EI 12EI 2
3 Ma.L
θaa =
12EI
Ma.L
or θaa = . It can be written as
4EI
θaa = Ma
L
4EI
5.2. STIFFNESS FACTOR :− The term 4EI/L is called the stiffness factor “stiffness factor is defined as
the moment required to be applied at A to produce unit rotation at point A of the propped cantilever beam
shown.”
5.3. CARRY-OVER FACTOR:− The constant (1/2) in equation 3 is called the carry-over factor.
Ma
Mb =
2
Mb 1
=
Ma 2
“Carry-over factor is the ratio of the moment induced at the far end to the moment applied at near end for a
propped cantilever beam.” Now consider a simply supported beam carrying end moment at A.
Ma
A B
aa L
EI = Constt:
MaL
Ma 2EI
EI
(M/EI Diagram)
+
2
L
MaL 3 MaL 3θaa EI
θaa = × = or Ma =
2EI L 3EI L
Compare this Ma with that for a propped cantilever beam. We find that
Stiffness factor of a simple beam is 3/4th of the cantilever beam. So propped cantilever beam is more stiff.
10,000
M
4000 E 4000 C
A
10,000
D
Consider a simple structure shown in the diagram which is under the action of applied moment M.
For the equilibrium requirements at the joint, it is obvious that the summation of moments ( ∑ M ) should
be zero at the joint. This means that the applied moment ‘M’ will be distributed in all the members
meeting at that joint in proportion to their stiffness factor. (This called stiffness – concept)
EXAMPLE NO. 1:- Now take the continuous beam as shown in the figure and analyze it by moment
distribution method.
5 KN/m 20KN
5m
A B 4I C
3I
10m 10m
41.67 41.67 25 25
A B B C
3/7 4/7
41.67 16.67
Locking moment = reactive moment
Locking 25
moment 41.67 25
A C
41.67
B 16.67= net moment at B
7.14
B C
A B 9.53
16.67
5 × 102
Mfab = = + 41.67 KN−m
12
Mfba = − 41.67 KN−m
20 × 52 × 5
Mfbc = = + 25 KN−m
102
Mfcb = − 25 KN−m
M = 16.67 is to be distributed. (Net moment at B support)
Total stiffness of members of joint B = 7
3 3
so Mab = × M = × 16.67 = 7.14 KN−m
7 7
4 4
and Mbc = × M = × 16.67 = 9.53 KN−m
7 7
The distribution factor at joint A is obviously equal to zero being a fixed joint. In the above
diagram and the distribution factor at point C is infact 1 being an exterior pin support. (If we apply moment
to the fixed support, same reactive moment will develop, so re−distribution moment is not created for all
fixed supports and if a moment is applied at a pin support, we reactive moment develops.)
Fixed ended moments are sometimes referred to as the restraining moments or the locking
moments. “The locking moments are the moments required to hold the tangents straight or to lock
the joints against rotation”.
262 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Consider the above diagram. Joint A is fixed joint. Therefore, the question of release of this joint
does not arise. Now let us release joint to the net locking moments acting at joint B is 16.67 in the
clockwise direction. After releasing the joint B, the same moment (16.67) will act at joint B in the
counterclockwise direction. This net released moment will be distributed to various members framing into
the joint B w.r.t. their distribution factors. In this case, 7.14 KN−m in the counterclockwise direction will
act on member BA and 9.53 KN−m in the counterclockwise direction will act on member BC.
Now we hold the joint B in this position and give release to joint ‘C’. The rotation at joint ‘C’
should be such that the released moment at joint ‘C’ should be 25 KN−m. The same procedure is repeated
for a desired number of cycles. The procedure explained above corresponds to the first cycle.
Joints. A B C
Members. AB BA BC CB
K 3 3 4 4
Cycle No. D. Factor 0 0.428 0.572 1
F.E.M. + 41.67 − 41.67 + 25 − 25
1 Balancing
moment. 0 + 7.14 + 9.53 + 25
2 COM. + 3.57 0 + 12.5 + 4.77
Bal. 0 − 5.35 − 7.15 − 4.77
3 COM. − 2.67 0 − 2.385 − 3.575
Bal. 0 + 1.02 + 1.36 + 3.575
∑ + 42.57 − 38.86 + 38.86 0
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 263
5 KN/m 20KN
42.57 38.86 38.86
A 10m B B 10m C
+25 +25 +10 +10 __ due to applied loads
+0.371 -0.371 +3.886 -3.886 __ due to end moments
A 5 KN/m B 5m C
10m 10m
25.371 13.886
+ +
SFD
24.629 6.114
1.973m 30.570
2.8
+ +
B.M.D
2.12m
38.86
42.57
POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES :−
Near A: Span AB
MX = 25.371 X − 42.57 − 2.5 X2 = 0 See free-body diagram
2.5 X − 25.371 X + 42.57 = 0
2
Near B :−
Mx′ = − 38.86 + 24.629 X′ − 2.5 X′2 = 0
2.5 X′ 2 − 24.629 X′ + 38.86 = 0
X′ = 1.973 m
Span BC (near B)
X// = 2.8 m
EXAMPLE NO. 2:− Analyze the following beam by moment-distribution method. Draw S.F. & B.M.
diagrams. Sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :−
A 2m 2m D
5m B 8m C
EI = Constt:
3 (5)2
Mfab = + = + 6.25 KN−m
12
Mfba = − 6.25 KN−m
6 × 82
Mfbc = + = + 32 KN−m
12
Mfcb = − 32 KN−m
36 × 22 × 2
Mfcd = + 18 KN−m
42
Mfdc = − 18 KN−m
I
Member. I L Krel.
L
1
AB 1 5 × 40 8
5
1
BC 1 8 × 40 5
8
1
CD 1 4 × 40 10
4
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 265
Joint A B C D
Members. AB BA BC CB CD DC
K 8 8 5 5 10 10
Cycle No. D.F. 0 0.615 0.385 0.333 0.667 1
1 F.E.M + 6.25 −6.25 +32 − 32 + 18 − 18
Bal. 0 −15.836 −9.914 +4.662 +9.338 + 18
2 Com. − 7.918 0 +2.331 −4.957 +9 +4.669
Bal. 0 −1.433 −0.897 −1.346 −2.697 −4.669
3 Com. − 0.7165 0 −0.673 −0.4485 −2.3345 −1.3485
Bal. 0 +0.414 +0.259 + 0.927 +1.856 +1.3485
∑ − 2.385 −23.141 +23.11 −33.16 +33.16 0
3KN/m 6KN/m
2.38 23.11 23.11 33.16 33.16 36KN
A B B C C D
5m 8m
+7.5 +7.5 +24 +24 +18 +18 __ reaction due to applied load
-5.098 +5.098 -1.261 +1.261 +8.29 -8.29 __ reaction due to end moment
a =0.8m +
+
2.40
0 0 S.F.D.
b=3.79m
9.71 9.71
15.598 Va=2.402-3a=0
19.42 a = 2.402 = 0.8m
3
X X X X Vb=22.739-6b=0
3.34 + b=3.79m
0
0
2.380 23.11 BMD
33.16
POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES :−
Span AB (near A)
MX = 2.38 + 2.402 X − 1.5 X2 = 0
1.5 X2 − 2.402 X − 2.38 = 0
2.402 ± (2.402)2 + 4 × 1.5 × 2.38
X=
2 x 1.5
X = 2.293 m
Span BC (near B)
MX′ = − 23.11 + 22.739 X′ − 3 X′2 = 0
3 X′2 − 22.739 X′ + 23.11 = 0
From (1)
− ( Mab − Mfab)
θb = − 2 θa → (3)
Krel
2 (Mab − Mfab)
Mba = Mfba + Krel + 4 θa − θa
Krel
EXAMPLE NO. 3:− Analyze the following beam by moment-distribution method. Draw shear force and
B.M. diagrams & sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :−
1.2KN/m 8KN
3KN 2m
A B C D
1m 4m 5m 4m
2I 4I 3I
+ 1.2 × 52
Mfbc = = + 2.5 KN−m
12
8 × 22 × 2
Mfcd = = + 4 KN−m
42
Mfdc = − 4 KN−m
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 269
I
Span I L Krel
L
2
AB 2 4 × 20 10
4
4
BC 4 5 × 20 16
5
3
CD 3 4 × 20 15
4
Moment at A = 3 × 1 = 3 KN−m. (Known from the loaded given beam according to our sign convention.)
The applied moment at A is counterclockwise but fixing moments are reactive moments.
Step 3: D.F.
Joint D.F. Members.
A 1 AB
10
B = 0.385 BA
26
16
B = 0.615 BC
26
16
C = 0.516 CB
31
15
C = 0.484 CD
31
D 4 =1 DC
4 + 0
Now attempt the promlem in a tabular form to determine end moments.
1.2KN/m 8KN
3KN 2m
A B C D
1m
4m 5m
5.235
1.936
0.845 0.845 +
+ +
0 0 S.F.D.
2.765
3 3 X=1.61m 2.765
4.064
1.936 - 1.2 x X = 0
5.53
X=1.61 m for B in portion BC 0.38 1.94 X X +
+
0 0 B.M.D.
3 X
4.94
LOCATION OF POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES :−
MX = − 0.845 X +0.38 = 0
X = 0.45 m from B. in portion BA.
MX′ = 4.064 X′ − 4.94 − 0.6 X′2 = 0
0.6X′2 − 4.064 X′ + 4.94 = 0
4.064 ± (4.064)2 − 4 × 0.6 × 4.94
X′ =
2 x 0.6
= 1.59 m from C in span BC
MX" = − 4.94 + 5.235 X" = 0
X" = 0.94 m from C in span CD
5.7. MOMENT−DISTRIBUTION METHOD (APPLICATION TO SINKING OF SUPPORTS) :−
Consider a generalized differential sinking case as shown below:
L
EI Constt:
B
MFab A R
B
MFba
LMFab
4 EI
MFab LMFba
Bending moments are EI
induced due to differential 4 EI
sinking of supports. +
0 0 B.M.D.
L/2
MFba
5/6L EI
272 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
(1) Change of slope between points A and B (θab) = 0 ( First moment−area theorem )
L L
(1) Mfab − Mfba = 0
4EI 4EI
or Mfab = Mfba
Mfab L − L
L 5 L
(2) ∆ =
4EI 6 4EI Mfab 6 ( Second moment area theorem ), simplify.
6EI ∆ = L2Mfab
6EI ∆ ∆
or Mfab = Mfba = , where R=
L2 L
6EI R
Mfab = Mfba =
L
Equal FEM’s are induced due to differential sinking in one span.
The nature of the fixed end moments induced due to the differential settlement of the supports
depends upon the sign of R. If R is (+ve) fizingmment is positive or vice versa. Care must be exercised in
working with the absolute values of the quantity 6EIR/L which should finally have the units of B.M.
(KN−m). Once the fixed end moments have been computed by using the above formula, these are
distributed in a tabular form as usual.
EXAMPLE NO.4:− Analyse the continuous beam shown due to settlement at support B by moment −
distribution method. Apply usual checks & draw S.F., B.M. diagrams & hence sketch the elastic curve take
E = 200 × 106 , I = 400 × 10−6 m4
A B C D
2I 4I 3I
15mm
1m 4m B 5m 4m
SOLUTION :−
Step (1) F.E.M. In such cases, Absolute Values of FEM’s are to be calculated
6EI∆ 6(200 × 106 )(2 × 400 × 10−6 )(+0.015)
Mfab = Mfba = 2 =
L 42
∆
= + 900 KN−m (positive because angle R = is clockwise).
L
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 273
16KN
B 2m 2m
C
1.5m 3I
8 KN
2I
1.5m
SOLUTION :−
Step 1: F.E.M :−
8 × 1.52 × 1.5
Mfab = + = + 3 KN−m
32
8 × 1.52 × 1.5
Mfba = − = − 3 KN−m
32
16 × 22 × 2
Mfbc = + = + 8 KN−m
42
Mfcb = − 8 KN−m
I
Members. I L Krel
L
2
AB 2 3 × 12 8
3
3
BC 3 4 × 12 9
4
7.006
B,M. & S.F. DIAGRAMS :−
5.35KN-m 16KN
9.325 KN-m
2m 2m
B C
7.006KN
8.994KN
7.006
Mx=7.006X-5.35=0 + S.F.D.
0 0
x=0.764m
Mx=8.994 X-9.325=0 8.994 8.994
x=1.057 m
8.662
X + X
0 0 B.M.D.
5.35
9.325
276 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
(rotated member) A B
3.825 +
5.35 9.325
+ + C
BMD B
8.662
1.825
ELASTIC CURVE
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 277
EXAMPLE NO.6:− Analyze the frame shown in the fig. by Moment Distribution Method.
20KN 20KN
A 2m 4m B 4m 2m C
5I 5I
4m 2I 2I 4m
6m 2I
D
F
E
6m 6m
SOLUTION :−
Step 1: F.E.M :−
+ 20 × 42 × 2
Mfab = = + 17.778 KN−m
62
− 20 × 22 × 4
Mfba = = − 8.889 KN−m
62
+ 20 × 22 × 4
Mfbc = = + 8.889 KN−m
62
− 20 × 42 × 2
Mfcb = = − 17.778 KN−m
62
Mfad = MFda = 0
Mfbe = Mfeb = 0 There are no loads on these spans.
Mfcf = Mffc = 0
Step 2: RELATIVE STIFFNESS (K) :−
I
Members. I L Krel
L
5
AB 5 6 × 12 10
6
5
BC 5 6 × 12 10
6
2
AD 2 4 × 12 6
4
2
BE 2 6 × 12 4
6
2
CF 2 4 × 12 6
4
278 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
A AD 0.375
A AB 0.625
B BA 0.417
B BE 0.166
B BC 0.417
C CB 0.625
C CF 0.375
F FC 0
E EB 0
D DA 0
12.034 15 12.034
A 6.667 B C 6.667
2.5
+2.5
4m 6m 4m
2.5
+2.5
3.334 E 3.334
D F
12.034 15 12.034
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 279
7.966
+ + S.F.D. (KN)
0 0
12.034
0.554m
1.813m
+ +
0 0 B.M.D. (KN-m)
14.444 6.667
6.667
F
6.667
D
2.5
6.667
2.5
0
0
6.66
B
+
+
6m
3.334
3.334
2.5
2.5
3.334
X
3.334
3.334
0
0
2.5
0
E
2.5
C
A
A B C
D
F
E
Elastic Curve
EXAMPLE NO. 7:- Analyze the following frame by Moment Distribution Method.
SOLUTION:− This is a double story frame carrying gravity and lateral loads and hence would be able to
sway both at upper and lower stories.
2KN/m
C D
3m
2I 2KN/m 2I
3KN/m B
I E
2I 2I 3m
A 5m
3 × 32
Mfab = = + 2.25 KN−m
12
Mfba = − 2.25 KN−m
3 × 32
Mfbc = = + 2.25
12
Mfcb = − 2.25 KN−m.
2.52
Mfbe = Mfcd = = + 4.167 KN−m
12
Mfeb = Mfdc = − 4.167 KN−m
Mfde = Mfcd = 0
Mfef = Mffe = 0
282 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1 D 1
C
5m
R I R
B E
2I 3m
A F
+ 6EI ∆ + 6E(2I ) ∆
Mfbc = Mfcb = = × 900 = + 1200 (Note: 900 value is an arbitrary multiplier)
L2 32
+ 6 EI ∆ + 6 E(2 I) ∆
Mfde = Mfed = = × 900 = + 1200 (Because R is clockwise)
L2 32
Step 4: F.E.Ms. Due To Side Sway Of Lower Storey :−
C I D
5m
3m 2I -R -R
2 2
B E
R R
3m 2I
A F
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 283
− 6E(2I) ∆
Mfbc = Mfcb =Mfde = Mfed = × 900 = − 1200
9
(R is counter clockwise so negative)
+ 6EI(2I) ∆
Mfab = Mfba = × 900 = + 1200 (R is clockwise, So positive)
9
+ 6EI(2I) ∆
Mfef = Mffe = × 900 = + 1200 (R is clockwise, So positive)
9
Determination Of Shear Co-efficients (K1, K2) for upper and lower stories :−
Upper Storey: M CB M DE
C D
3m 3m
3KN/m
M BC E M ED
B HB HE
MBC+MCB MED+MDE
HB = 4.5+ HE =
3 3
Shear Conditions :
1. Upper story Hb + He =0 (1) where Hb and He values in terms of end
moments are shown in the relavant diagram.
2. Lower storey Ha + Hf = 0 (2)
3m 3m
3KN/m
HA A F HF
M AB MFE
MBA MFE+MEF
4.5+ MAB+ HF =
HA = 3 3
Where Ha and Hf values in terms of end moments are shown in the relavant diagram
Now we attempt the problem in a tabular form. There would be three tables , one due to loads(Table−A),
other due to FEMs of upper story (Table−B) and lower story (Table−C).
Insert these three tables here. Now end moment of a typical member would be the sum of moment due
284 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
to applied loads ± K1 × same end moment due to sway of upper story ± K2 × same end moment due to
sway of lower story. Picking up the values from tables and inserting as follows we have.
Mab = 1.446 − K1(143.66) + K2 (1099 .625).
Mba = − 3.833 − K1 (369.4) + K2 (1035.46)
Mbc = − 0.046 + K1 (522.71) − K2 (956.21)
Mcb = − 4.497 + K1 (314.84) − K2 (394.38).
Mcd = + 4.497 − K1 (314.84) + K2 (394.38)
Mdc = − 3.511 − K1 (314.84) + K2 (394.38)
Mde = + 3.511 + K1 (314.84) − K2 (394.38)
Med = + 2.674 + K1 (522.71) − K2 (956.29).
Mef = + 1.335 − K1 (369.4) + K2 (1035.46)
Mfe = + 0.616 − K1 (193.66) + K2 (1099.625).
Mbe = + 3.878 − K1 (153.32) − K2 (79.18)
Meb = 4.009 − K1 (153.32) − K2 (79.18)
Put these expressions of moments in equations (1) & (2) & solve for K1 & K2.
1571.88 K1 − 59.68 = 0
K1 = 0.03797
K2 = 0.01915
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD 285
Putting the values of K1 and K2 in above equations , the following end moments are obtained.
FINAL END MOMENTS :−
These values also satisfy equilibrium of end moments at joints. For simplicity see end
moments at joints C and D.
CHAPTER SIX
Mab P1 P2 Mba
b
A B
a
Elastic Curve
Tangent at A
L
A GENERAL BEAM ELEMENT UNDER END MOMENTS AND LOADS
2EI θa
→ (4) where k1=
I1
=− = − 2E k1 θa
L L1
/
M ba = rotation contribution of for end B of member AB.
2 EI θb
So M/ba = − = − 2Ek1 θb → (5)
L
KANIS METHOD OF FRAME ANALYSIS 289
Now consider a generalized joint A in a frame where members AB, AC, AD.........meet. It carries a
moment M.
B
k1
M
k3
E C
A k2
k3
or Mab + Mac + Mad + Mae..................= 0 Putting these end moments in form of eqn. (3)
or ∑MF (ab, ac, ad) + 2 ∑M′ (ab, ac, ad ) + ∑M′ (ba, ca, da) = 0
So MFa + 2 ∑M′ (ab, ac, ad) + ∑M′ (ba, ca, da) = 0 → (6)
1
From (6), ∑M′ (ab, ac, ad) = − [(MFa + ∑M′ (ba, ca, da)] → (7)
2
From (4), ∑M′ (ab, ac, ad) = − 2Ek1 θa − 2 Ek2 θa − 2 Ek3 θa + ...............
= − 2 Eθa ( k1 + k2 + k3)
1 k1
or M′ab = − [ MFa + ∑M′ (ba, ca, da)]
2 ∑k
1 k2
on similar lines M′ac = − [ MFa + ∑M′ (ba, ca, da)]
2 ∑k
1 k3
and M/ad = − [ MFa + ∑M′ (ba, ca, da)]
2 ∑k
rotation contribution of near sum of the rotations contributions of far
end of member ad. ends of members meeting at A.
=−
1 k1 1 k2 1 k3 1 k1 + k2 + k3 + .........
− − −
2 ∑k 2 ∑k 2 ∑k 2 ∑k
=−
1
2
[
, sum of rotation factors of different members meeting at a
joint is equal to –
1
2
]
Therefore, if net fixed end moment at any joint along with sum of the far end contribution of
members meeting at that joint are known then near end moment contribution can be determined. If
far end contributions are approximate, near end contributions will also be approximate. When Far
end contributions are not known (as in the first cycle), they can be assumed to be zero.
6.1. RULES FOR CALCULATING ROTATION CONTRIBUTIONS :__ Case-1: Without sides way.
Definition: “Restrained moment at a joint is the algebraic sum of FE.M’s of different members
meeting at that joint.”
1. Sum of the restrained moment of a joint and all rotation contributions of the far ends of
members meeting at that joint is multiplied by respective rotation factors to get the
required near end rotation contribution. For the first cycle when far end contributions
are not known, they may be taken as zero (Ist approximation).
2. By repeated application of this calculation procedure and proceeding from joint to joint
in an arbitrary sequence but in a specific direction, all rotation contributions are known.
The process is usually stopped when end moment values converge. This normally happens after
three or four cycles. But values after 2nd cycle may also be acceptable for academic.
6.2. Case 2:__ With side sway (joint translations)
(A) → Linear Displacement Contribution ( LDC) of a column = Linear displacement factor (LDF) of a
particular column of a story multiplied by [storey moment + contributions at the ends of columns
of that story]
3
Linear displacement factor (LDF) for columns of a storey = −
2
3 k
Linear displacement factor of a column = − Where k=stiffness of the column being
2 ∑k
considered and Σk is the sum of stiffness of all
columns of that storey.
1
6.2.2. (B) → Storey moment = Storey shear x of storey height.
3
6.2.3. (C) → Storey shear : It may be considered as reaction of column at horizontal beam / slab
levels due to lateral loads by considering the columns of each sotrey as simply supported beams in
vertical direction. “If applied load gives + R value (according to sign conversion of slope
deflection method), storey shear is +ve or vice versa.”
R
h
R
6.4. Rules for the Calculation of final end moments (sidesway cases)
(F) For beams, End moment = FEM + 2 near end contribution + Far end contributions.
(G) For columns, End moment. = FEM + 2 near end contribution + Far end contribution +
linear displacement contribution of that column for the latest cycle.
Example No.1: Analyze the following beam by rotation contribution method. EI is constant.
36K
7k/ft 6k/ft
A
B C D
16 24 12
EI = constt.
Note. Analysis assumes continuous ends with some fixity. Therefore, in case of extreme hinged
supports in exterior spans, modify (reduce) the stiffness by 3/4 = (0.75).for a hinged end.
wL2 3 × 162
Mfab = + = + = + 64 K-ft.
12 12
Mfba = − 64
6 × 242
Mfbc = + = + 288
12
Mfcb = − 288
Pa2b + 36 × 62 × 6
Mfcd = + 2 = = + 54
L 122
Mfdc = − 54
KANIS METHOD OF FRAME ANALYSIS 293
Step No.3. Draw Boxes, enter the values of FEMs near respective ends of exterior boxes and rotation
contribution factors appropriately (on the interior side).
restraining moment =
algebraic sum of FEM
meeting at that joint is extend
in inner box..
B C D
FEMs
+64 -64 -0.5( 3 ) +288 -288 -234 +54 -54 -0.5( 3 )
A 3+2 +224 3 -54
0 * -67.2 -0.3* * -44.8 +55.76 * * +83.64 -14.82 *-0.5
-0.2 -0.2 -0.3
0 -83.92 -55.95 +60.95 +91.43 -18.71
0 -84.48 -57 +61.94 +92.9 -19.45
* = Distribution factors.
2nd cycle:
A C ( Far end contributions) B D (far end contributions)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Joint B. − 0.3 (+ 224+0 +55.76) = − 83.92 Joint C: − 0.2 (− 234 − 55.95 − 14.82) = 60.95
− 0.2 (+224+0 +55.76) = − 55.85 − 0.3 (− 234 − 55.95 − 14.82) = 91.43
3rd cycle: Singular to second cycle procedure. We stop usually after 3 cycles and the answers can be
further refined by having another couple of cycles. (Preferably go up to six cycles till difference in moment
value is 0.1 or less). The last line gives near and far end contribution.
Step No. 4. FINAL END MOMENTS
For beams. End moment = FEM + 2near end cont. + Far end contribution.
Mab = + 64 + 2 x 0 − 84.48 = − 20.48 k − ft.
Mba = − 64 − 2 x 84.48 + 0 = − 232.96 k − ft.
Mbc = + 288− 2 x 57 + 61.94 = +235.9 k − ft.
Mcb = − 288 + 2 x 61.94 − 57 = − 221.12
Mcd = + 54 + 2 x 92.9 − 19.45 = + 220.35
Mdc = − 54 − 2 x 19.45 + 92.9 = zero
The beam has been analyzed and we can draw shear force and bending moment diagrams as usual.
294 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
9K
1 k/ft
6 10 C
A 3I B 2I
2I 10
D 12
I
Span I L Krel K modified.
L
3
AB 3 16 × 240 45 45
16
40
2 3
BC 2 12 × 240 30 (Exterior hinged end)
12 4
2
BD 2 10 × 240 48 48 .
10
∑103
Step No.2. FEM’s
9 × 6 × 102
Mfab = = + 21.1 K-ft
162
9 × 10 × 62
Mfba = = − 12.65
162
1 × 122
Mfbc = = + 12
12
Mfcb = − 12
Step No. 3. Draw Boxes, enter values of FEM’s, rotation contribution factors etc.
B C
FEM's
*
0 0
D
(rotation contribution factor)
Apply all relevant rules in three cycles. Final end moments may now be calculated.
For beams. End moment = FEM + 2 x near end contribution. + Far end contribution
For Columns : End moment = FEM + 2 x near end contribution + Far end contribution + Linear
displacement contribution of that column. To be taken in sway cases only.
Mab = 21.1 + 2x0 –1.03 = + 20.07 K−ft
Mba = −12.65 –2 x 1.03 + 0 = −14.71
Mbc = +12 –2 x 0.69 + 6.345 = 16.965
Mbd = 0 – 2x1.1 +0 = −2.2
Mcb = −12 + 2x 6.345 –0.69 = 0
Mdb = 0 + 2x0−1.10 = −1.10
Equilibrium checks are satisfied. End moment values are OK. Now SFD and BMD can be drawn as usual.
Example No. 3: Analyse the following frame by rotation Contribution Method.
SOLUTION:-
It can be seen that sway case is there.
16k
5 15
B C
4I
10 I I
A
20
296 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
* +45 -15 *
+45
-0.333 -14.98 -0.333 -15
+9.98
-18.93 +10.67
* -19.57 +10.47 *
-0.167 -0.167
0 +5.0 0
-7.51
+5.35 LDC
-9.49 LDC +5.25
-9.80
+1.8825
-0.75 +3.105
-3/2(1/2)=
+3.41
-0.75
LDF
Linear disp. FEMs
factors * = rotation factors.
*
0 0
*
0 0 D
A Rotation factor
Rotation factor
2nd cycle.
A C( Far ends)
↓ ↓
Joint B. − 0.167 [ +45 + 0 + 9.98 + 1.8825 ] = − 9.49 (Span BA)
and − 0.333 [ −−−−−−− do −−−−−−−− ] = − 18.93 (Span BC)
For beams: End moment = FEM + 2 near end contribution. + Far end contribution.
For columns. End moment = FEM + 2 near end contribution + Far end contribution.
+ linear displacement. contribution of that column.
Example No 4 : Solve the following double story frame carrying gravity and lateral loads by rotation
contribution method.
2 KN/m
C D
(I)
2I 2I 3m 2I
2 KN/m
3 KN/m B E
(I)
2I 2I 3m 2I
A F
5m
I
SOLUTION :−
If this is analyzed by slope-deflection or Moment distribution method, it becomes very lengthy and
laborious. This becomes easier if solved by rotation contribution method.
Step 1: F.E.Ms.
+ 3 × 32
Mfab = = + 2.25 KN−m
12
Mfba = − 2.25 KN−m
Mfbc = + 2.25 KN−m
Mfcb = − 2.25 KN−m
2 × 52
Mfcd = = + 4.17 KN−m
12
Mfdc = − 4.17 KN−m
Mfbe = + 4.17 KN−m
Mfeb = − 4.17 KN−m.
Mfde = Mfed = 0
Mfef = Mffe = 0
I
Span I L K
L
2
AB 2 3 × 15 10
3
2
BC 2 3 × 15 10
3
KANIS METHOD OF FRAME ANALYSIS 299
1
BE 1 5 × 15 3
5
1
CD 1 5 × 15 3
5
2
DF 2 3 × 15 10
3
2
EF 2 3 × 15 10
3
3 K
L.D.F. = −
2 ∑K
Where K is the stiffness of that column & ∑K is the stiffness of columns of that storey. Assuming columns
of equal sizes in a story. ( EI same)
3 10
L.D.F1 = − × = − 0.75 (For story No. 1)
2 (10 + 10)
3 10
L.D.F2 = − × = − 0.75 (For story No. 2)
2 (10 + 10)
Storey Shear :−
This is, in fact, reaction at the slab or beam level due to horizontal forces. If storey shear causes a
(−ve) value of R, it will be (−ve) & vice versa.
For determining storey shear the columns can be treated as simply supported vertical beams.
(1) Storey shear = − 9 KN ( For lower or ground story. At the slab level of ground story)
(2) Storey shear = − 4.5 ( For upper story ). At the slab level of upper story root)
Rotation Factors
The sum of rotation factors at a joint is − ½. The rotation factors are obtained by dividing the
value − ½ between different members meeting at a joint in proportion to their K values.
300 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1 k1
µab = −
2 ∑k
1 k2
µac = − etc.
2 ∑k
Rotation Contributions:−
1 10
BC 10 − = − 0.217
2 23
− 0.5 = − 0.065
3
BE 3
23
− 0.5 = − 0.217
10
BA 10
23
CB 10 − 0.385
CD 3 − 0.115
DC 3 − 0.115
DE 10 − 0.385
ED 10 − 0.217
EB 3 − 0.065
EF 10 − 0.217
bc=-0.217 ed=-0.217
be F.E.M. = -4.17
F.E.M. = +4.17 eb=
B 4.17 =-0.065 -4.17 E
-0.065
R.C.
R.C.
-0.27 0.16 ef=-0.217
ba=-0.217
-0.89 -0.33
-1.27 -0.70
R.C. F.E.M. = -2.25 R.C. F.E.M. = 0
-1.51 -0.97
-0.9 0.55
-1.68 -1.16
-2.96 -1.1
-4.24 L.D.C. -1.89 -1.31
-1.95 -2.33
-5.05 7 -1.41 L.D.C.
L.D.F.= -1.95 3.23
-5.61 9.8 -1.48 7
-0.75 -3.88
-6.00 11.68
-4.37 9.8 L.D.F.
-6.30
12.96 11.68 = -0.75
-6.50 -4.69
13.87 -4.93 12.96
14.53 13.87
14.99 14.53
15.00 14.99
15.00
F.E.M. = 0
F.E.M. = +2.25
F
A
Double – storey frame carrying gravity and lateral loads – Analysed by Rotation Contribution Method.
302 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
First Cycle :−
Linear Displacement Contribution :−= L.D.F.[Storey moment + Rotation contribution at the end
of columns of that storey].
Near end contribution = R.F.[Restrained moment + Far end contribution + Linear displacement
contributions of columns of different storeys meeting at that joint]
Joint B= R.F. (4.17 + 0.16 − 0.39 + 7 + 2.7 )
C= ″ (1.92 + 0.49 − 2.96 + 2.7)
D= ″ (− 4.17 − 0.25 + 0.55 + 2.7)
E= ″ (− 4.17 + 0.45 − 0.89 + 2.7 + 7 ).
After 2nd Cycle :−
3rd Cycle :−
4th Cycle :−
5th Cycle :−
6th Cycle :−
7th Cycle :−
END MOMENTS :−
Now frame is statically determinate and contains all end moments. It can be designed now.
CHAPTER SEVEN
P1 P2 WKN/m
Ma A
B MB
L
EI=Constt. (d) Loading on top of
(a) Given beam analogous column,
under loads Ms diagram, same as(b).
0 0 1 (Unity)
(b) B.M.D. due to
applied loads, on simple span L
plotted on the
compressin side. (e) X-section of analogous
column.
0 0
MB Mb
MA (c) B.M.D. due to Ma
(f) Pressure on bottom of
redundants, plotted analogous column,
on the compression Mi diagram.
side on simple span
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 307
The resultant of B.M.D’s due to applied loads does not fall on the mid point of analogous column
section which is eccentrically loaded.
Msdiagram = BDS moment diagram due to applied loads.
Mi diagram = Indeterminate moment diagram due to redundants.
If we plot (+ve) B.M.D. above the zero line and (−ve) B.M.D below the zero line (both on
compression sides due to two sets of loads) then we can say that these diagrams have been plotted on the
compression side.
(The conditions from which MA & MB can be determined, when the method of consistent
deformation is used, are as follows). From the Geometry requirements, we know that
(1) The change of slope between points A & B = 0; or sum of area of moment diagrams between
A & B = 0 (note that EI = Constt:), or area of moment diagrams of fig.b = area of moment diagram
of fig..c.
(2) The deviation of point B from tangent at A = 0; or sum of moment of moment diagrams between A
& B about B = 0, or Moment of moment diagram of fig.(b) about B = moment of moment diagram
of fig.(c) about B. Above two requirements can be stated as follows.
(1) Total load on the top is equal to the total pressure at the bottom and;
(2) Moment of load about B is equal to the moment of pressure about B),
indicates that the analogous column is on equilibrium under the action of applied loads
and the redundants.
7.1. SIGN CONVENTIONS:−
It is necessary to establish a sign convention regarding the nature of the applied load (Ms −
diagram) and the pressures acting at the base of the analogous column (Mi−diagram.)
1. Load ( P) on top of the analogous column is downward if Ms/EI diagram is (+ve) which means that
it causes compression on the outside or (sagging) in BDS vice-versa. If EI is constant, it can be
taken equal to units.
Outside
C
Inside T
3. Moment (M) at any point of the given indeterminate structure ( maximum to 3rd degree) is given by
the formula.
M = Ms − Mi,
EXAMPLE NO. 1:− Determine the fixed−ended moments for the beam shown below by the method of
column analogy.
SOLUTION:
Choosing BDS as a simple beam. Draw Ms diagram. Please it on analogous column.
W/Unit length.
A B
EI=Constt.
L 2 Ms-diagram
WL
8 (B.M.D. due to applied
loads on B.D.S.)
+
Loading on top of
0 0 analogous column.
WL3
12 WL3
12
X-section of
1 analogous column
Mi-diagam
L 2
WL Pressure on bottom of
2 analogous column.(uniform as
WL 0 12
12 resultant falls on the mid point of
analogous column section
2 WL2 /24
WL + 2
12 0 WL (Final BMD) M = Ms - Mi
12
P
Pressure at the base of the column =
A
A = L × I (area of analogous column section).
WL3
=
12(Lx1)
WL2
Mi = . In this case, it will be uniform as resultant of Ms
12
diagram falls on centroid of analogous column)
(MS)a = 0 , (Ms at point A to be picked up for M-s diagram)
W/unit-length
A B
EI=Constt.
L
3
WL
L/4 6 3/4L
0 0 Ms-diagram
(It creates hagging so load acts upwards)
The resultant of Ms diagram does not fall on
2 the centroid of analogous column.
WL
2
L/4 L/2
3
WL yo
6 M X-section of
1 3
analogous column. Carrying eccentric load of WL /6
L 3
yo Eccentric load wL /6 acts on centre of
Centroidal axis analogous column x-section with an
associated moment as well
(Eccentric load = Concentric load plus accomprying moment)
bh L × WL2 WL3
Area of Ms diagram A = = =
(n+1) 2(2+1) 6
b L L
X′ = = = (from nearest and)
(n+2) (2+2) 4
Alternatively centroid can be located by using the following formula)
∫ MXdX
X =
∫ MdX
L L
WX2 W X3 WL3
∫ MdX = ∫ − dX = − | = − ( Same as above)
o 2 2 3 o 6
L L
WX2 WX3
∫ MXdX = ∫ − XdX = ∫ − dx
o 2 o 2
L
W X4 WL4
= − | = −
2 4 o 8
− ∫ MXdX
X =
∫ MdX
310 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
− − WL4 6 3
X = × = L. (from the origin of moment
8 (−WL3) 4
expression or from farthest end)
NOTE : Moment expression is always independent of the variation of inertia.
Properties of Analogous Column X−section :−
P Mc
(Mi)a = ± (P is the area of Ms diagram and is acting upwards so negative
A I
L L3
C= and I = )
2 12
−WL3 WL4 . L . 12
= − (Load P on analogous column is negative)
6.L 24 . 2 . L3
− WL2 WL2
= − ( Reaction due to MC/I would be having the same
6 4
direction at A as that due to P while at B these
−2WL2 − 3 WL2
= two would be opposite)
12
−5
= WL2
12
− WL2
(Ms)a =
2
Ma = (Ms − Mi)a
− WL2 5
= + WL2
2 12
− 6 WL2 + 5 WL2
=
12
− WL2
Ma =
12
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 311
Mb = (Ms − Mi)b
P Mc
(Mi)b = ±
A I
− WL3 WL4 × L × 12
= +
6×L 24 × 2 × L3
−WL2 WL2
= +
6 4
− 2WL2 + 3 WL2
=
12
WL2
=
12
(Ms)b = 0
WL2 WL2
Mb = (Ms − Mi)b = 0 − =−
12 12
Same results have been obtained but effort / time involved is more for this BDS).
EXAMPLE NO. 3:− Determine the F.E.Ms. by the method of column analogy for the following loaded
beam.
3.1 SOLUTION:− CASE 1 ( WHEN BDS IS A SIMPLE BEAM )
a b
L
Pab
L
+ Ms-diagram
L+b
L+a 3
1 (Pab) Pab
3 xL= 2
2 L
e
Pab
2
M
1 x-section of analogous column
L
L L + a 3 L − 2 L − 2a L − 2 a
e = − = = ( The eccentricity of load w.r.t
2 3 6 6
mid point of analogous column)
Pab L − 2 a Pab
M=
2 6 = 12 (L − 2a)
312 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
L3
2. I =
12
L
3. C =
2
P Mc
(Mi)a = ±
A I
Pab Pab L × 12
= + (L − 2a) ×
2L 12 2 × L3
Pab Pab
= + (L − 2a)
2L 2 L2
2 PabL − 2 Pa2b
=
2 L2
PabL − Pa2b
(Mi)a =
L2
Pab (L − a)
= ∴a+b=L
L2
b=L−a
Pab . b
=
L2
Pab2
(Mi)a =
L2
(Ms) a = 0
Pab2
=0−
L2
Pab2
Ma = −
L2
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 313
The (−ve) sign means that it gives us tension at the top when applied at A.
P MC
(Mi)b = ±
A I
Pab Pab L × 12
= − (L − 2a) ×
2L 12L2 2 × L3
Pab Pab
= − (L − 2a)
2L 2L2
2Pa2b
=
2L2
Pa2b
(Mi)b =
L2
(Ms)b = 0
Pa2b
Mb = (Ms − Mi)a = 0 −
L2
− Pa2b
Mb =
L2
A a b
EI=Constt B
L
1 Pa(a) =
2
Pa 2
2 0 Ms-diagram (load equal to area of
0
Ms diagram acts upwards)
3L − 2a
=
L a
e = −
2 3 6
L3 L
Properties of Analogous Column section :− A = L , I = 12 , C = 2
P MC
(Mi)a = ±
A I
−4 Pa2L + 2Pa3
=
2L2
−2Pa2L + Pa3
=
L2
Pa2 (a − 2L)
=
L2
−Pa2 (2L − a)
= , We can write 2L − a = L + L − a = L + b
L2
−Pa2 (L + b)
(Mi)a =
L2
(Ms)a = − Pa
Ma = (Ms − Mi)a
Pa2(L + b)
= −Pa +
L2
− PaL (L − a) + Pa2 b
=
L2
− PabL + Pa2 b
=
L2
− Pab (L − a)
=
L2
− Pab . b
=
L2
− Pab2
Ma = ( Same result as was obtained with a different BDS)
L2
P MC
(Mi)b = ±
A I
2 Pa2 L − 2Pa3
=
2L2
Pa2 L − Pa3
=
L2
+Pa2 (L − a )
=
L2
Pa2 b
(Mi)b =
L2
(Ms)b = 0
Mb = (Ms − Mi)b
Pa2 b
=0−
L2
− Pa2 b
Mb = ( Same result as obtained with a different BDS)
L2
316 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
EXAMPLE NO.4:− Determine the F.F.Ms. by the method of column analogy for the following loaded beam.
SOLUTION:−
Choosing cantilever supported at B as BDS.
w/unit length
A B
L/2 L/2
EI = Constt WL3
If B.D.S. is 48 L
a cantilever
8
supported 0 0
at b.
Ms-diagram = WL x L
2 4
2
WL
WL3
8
48
e=3/8 L
M
1
Analogous column
L section.
L L 4L − L 3L
Eccentricity = e= − = =
2 8 8 8
WL3 3L WL4 WL3 bh
Moment = Pe = M = × = Where P = Area of Ms diagram= =
48 8 128 48 n+1
Properties of Analogous column section.
L3 L
A = L, I = and C =
12 2
Step 1: Apply P= Area Of BMD(Ms diagram ) due to applied loads in a BDS at the center of analogous
column section i.e. at L/2 from either side.
Step 2: The accompanying moment Pe, where e is the eccentricity between mid point of analogous column
section and the point of application of area of Ms diagram, is also applied at the same point along
with P.
Step 3: Imagine reactions due to P and M=Pe. At points A and B, use appropriate signs.
P MC
(Mi)a = ± ( Subtractive reaction at A due to P)
A I
− WL 3
WL × L × 12
4
= + ( P is upwards, so negative. Reactions due to this P
48.L 128 × 2 × L3
at A and B will be downwards and those due to
moment term will be upward at A and downward
− WL2 3WL2
= + at B. Use opposite signs now for A)
48 64
− 4WL2 + 9WL2
=
192
+ 5 WL2
=
192
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 317
EXAMPLE NO. 5:− Determine the F.E. M’s by the method of column analogy for the following loaded beam.
SOLUTION:−
W/Unit length
A B
L/2 L/2
bh EI=Constt:
A= n+1 WL4
192
L WL3
x L
2 24 WL4 10 0
A= = 0
4 192
b 3
X=
n+2
Ms-diagram ( 1xWxL
2 2) 3 2
x L (L) = WL
24
L
= 4
2(3+2) WL
192
L
X= e
10 M
L L 5L − L 4L 2
e= − = = = L
2 10 10 10 5
4 5
M=
WL 2 L WL
192 × 5 = 480
318 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
− WL4 WL5 × L × 12
(Mi)a = + (Downward reaction at A due to P and upward reaction at A due to M)
192L 480 × 2 × L3
− WL3 WL3
= +
192 80
112 WL3
= ( Divide by 16)
15360
7 WL3
(Mi)a =
960
(Ms)a = 0
Ma = (Ms − Mi)a
7 −7
Ma = 0− WL3 = WL3
960 960
P MC
(Mi)b = ±
A I
WL3 WL3
= − −
192 80
− 272 WL3
=
15360
− 17 WL3
=
960
− WL3
(Ms)b =
24
Mb = (Ms − Mi) b
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 319
− WL3 17
= + WL3
24 960
− 40 WL3 + 17 WL3
=
960
− 23 WL3
Mb =
960
Note : After these redundant end moments have been determined, the beam is statically
determinate and reactions , S.F, B.M, rotations and deflections anywhere can be
found.
EXAMPLE NO. 6:− Determine the fixed−end moments for the beam shown by the method of column analogy
SOLUTION:__ BDS is a simple beam.
90kn
3kn/m 4m
A B
6m 10m
I=2 I=1
2
3x16 = 96
P2 8
b90
Ms dia. due 3.83m 3kn/m
EI to U.D.L. 45
0
0a (reactions due to UDL)
only. 0
C
8m 8m 24kn 6m 10m 24kn
P4 P1 90x12x4 M=24x6-3 x (6)2
135 16 2 90kn
Ms dia due = 270 =90kn-m
EI to point 4m 67.5 4m
(reactions due to
12m
concentrated load)
load only. 67.5kn
yo 16+4
P3 90x4 =22.5kn
3 =6.67m
x 16
M=22.5x6 =135kn-m
1/2 M 1
Analogous
9.15m 6.85m column
x-section.
Ms
The above two diagrams will be taken full first and then load corresponding to areas of these
EI
diagrams on left 6m distance will be subtracted. (P2 and P4 will be subtracted from P1 and P3 respectively).
This problem is different from the previous one in the following respects.
(a) Ms − diagram has to be divided by a given value of I for various portions of span.
(b) The thickness of the analogous column X − section will also vary with the variation of
inertia. Normally, the width 1/EI can be set equal to unity as was the case in previous
problem, when EI was set equal to unity.
(c) As the dimension of the analogous column X − section also varies in this case, we will have
to locate the centroidal axis of the column and determine its moment of inertia about it.
6
∫ MdX = ∫ (24X − 1.5 X2) dX (Simply supported beam moment due to UDL of left 6/ portion)
o
6
= 12X2 − 0.5X3 | = 12 × 36 − 0.5 × 216 = 432 − 108 = 324
o
area of abc = 324
6
∫ MXdX = ∫ (24X − 1.5X2) XdX
o
6
= ∫ (24X2 − 1.5X3) dX
o
6
24 3 1.5 4 1.5
= X − X | = 8 × 63 − × 64
3 4 o 4
= 1242
∫ MxdX 1242
X = = = 3.83 m from A. (of left 6/ portion of BMD)
∫ MdX 342
1 324
P2 = ( area abc) = = 162 KN( To be subtracted from Ms diagram )
2 2
1
P3 = × 16 × 270 = 2160 KN ( Area of BMD due to concentrated Load)
2
1
P4 = × 6 × 67.5 = 202.5 KN ( To be subtracted from Ms diagram )
2
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 321
1 × 103 0.5 × 63
Iy0 y0 = + 10(1.85)2 + + (0.5 × 6) × (6.15)2 = 240 m4
12 12
by neglecting the contribution of left portion about its own centroidal axis.
= P 1 + P3 − P2 − P4
= 2819.5 KN
Applied Moment about centroidal axis = M = + 1024 (1.15) − 2160 (0.18) − 162 (5.32) − 202.5 (5.15)
= − 1116 KN−m , clockwise (Note: distance 5.32 = 9.15 − 3.83 (and 5.15 = 9.15 − 4)
The (−ve) sign indicates that the net applied moment is clockwise.
P MC
(Mi)a = ± ( subtractive reactions at A)
A I
x
877.6kn-m
½ 1 1/2 Analogous column
x-section
6.34m 6.66m
yo
3KN/m
(BDS under UDL)
19.5 13m 19.5
90
3
∫ MdX = area abc = ∫ (19.5 X − 1.5 X2) dX
o
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 323
3
19.5 2 1.5 3
= X − X | = 74.25
2 3 o
3 3
19.5 3 1.5 4
∫ MXdX = ∫ (19.5 X2 − 1.5 X3) dX = X − X |
o 3 4 o
= 145.12
145.12
X = = 1.95.m ( From point A as shown )
74.25
4
Area def = ∫ MdX = ∫ (19.5X − 1.5 x2) dX = 124
o
4
∫ MXdX = ∫ (19.5 X2 − 1.5 x3) dX
o
4
19.5X3 1.5 4
= − X |
3 4 o
= 320
320
X = = 2.58 m ( From point B )
124
2
P1 = × 63.4 × 13 = 549.5 KN( Due to entire BMD due to UDL )
3
1 1
P2 = (area abc) = (74.25) = 37.125 KN ( To be subtracted )
2 2
1 1
P3 = (area def) = (124) = 62 KN ( To be subtracted )
2 2
1
P4 = × 249.23 × 13 = 1620 KN ( Entire area of BMD due to point load)
2
1
P5 = × 41.5 × 3 = 62.25 KN ( To be subtracted )
2
1
P6 = × 4 × 124.62 = 249.23 KN ( To be subtracted )
2
324 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
0.5 × 43 1 × 63
Iyoyo = + (0.5 × 4)(4.68)2 + + (1 × 6)(0.34)2
12 12
0.5 × 32
+ + (1.5)(4.84)2
12
= 101.05
Total concentric load on analogous column x – section to be applied at centroidal column axis )
Total applied moment at centroid of analogous column due to above six loads is
= 549.5 (0.16) + 37.125 (4.39) − 62(4.08) + 1620 (0.99) + 62.25 (4.34) − 249.2 (3.99)
= + 877.6 clockwise.
P MC
(Mi)a = ± ( Reactions due to P and M are subtractive at A)
A I
= + 130 KN−m
(Ms)a = 0
Ma = (Ms − Mi)a = 0 − 130 = − 130 KN−m
P MC
(Mi)b = ±
A I
= + 243 KN−m
(Ms)b = 0
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 325
Mb = (Ms − Mi)b
= 0 − 243
Mb = − 243 KN−m
Now the beam has become determinate.
EXAMPLE NO. 7:- (2) Choosing cantilever supported at B as a B.D.S. Let us solve the loaded beam
shown below again.
3KN/m 90KN
A B
2I I 2I
3m 6m 4m
P1=1098.5
bh 2.25m 3.25m
A = n+1 b d
13x253.5 a f
P1 = 60.79
3
C
=1098.5 P2= 13.5 126.75
6.75 e121.5
b 13 P3= 367 3x 13x13/2
X' = = Ms/EI diagram due to u.d.l
n+2 4 =3.25 (2nd degree curve)
g =253.5
bh 4x360 1.33m
P4 = A= n+1 = 2
=720 P4 = 720
b 4
X' = = =1.33 Ms/EI diagram due to point load 180
n+2 3
1/2 yo 360
1089.75Kn Ps=360KN 1.33m
1 3894KN-m
1/2
6.34m 6.66m
yo
Analogous column section
3KN/m 4m
A B
BDS under UDL
10m 253.5
3m 39
3
Area abc = ∫ MdX = ∫ −
3 2
o 2 X dX
326 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
3
X3
= − 1.5 | = 0.5 × 33 = − 13.5 ( Upwards to be subtracted)
3 o
3 43
1.5X
∫ MXdX = ∫ (1.5X3)dX = − |
o 4 o
= − 30.375
Location of centroidal axis from B: ( 1/2 × 3 + 1 × 6+1/2 × 4)X′ =(1/2 × 4 × 2+1 × 6 × 7+1/2 × 3 × 11.5)
9.5X’= 63.25 0r X’ = 6.66m from B or 6.34 m from A. (already done also)
− 30.375
location of centroid of area abc = X = = 2.25 m ( From A)
− 13.5
4
Area defg = ∫ MdX = ∫ (39X − 253.5 − 1.5X2)dX
o
4
∫ MXdX = ∫ (39X2 − 253.5X − 1.5X3)dX
o
4
39X3 253.5X2 1.5X4
= − − |
3 2 4 o
= − 1292
− 1292
X =
− 734
1 1
P2 = (area abc) = (13.5) = 6.75 K( To be subtracted)
2 2
1 1
P3 = ( area defg) = (734) = 367 KN( To be subtracted )
2 2
1
P5 = × 180 × 4 = 360 KN
2
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 327
P = P1 + P2 + P3 − P4 + P5
P MC
(Mi)a = ± ( Reactions are subtractive at A)
A I
(Ms)a = 0
Ma = (Ms − Mi)a
P MC
(Mi)b = ± ( Reactions are additive at B )
A I
Ma=K a Mb=(COF)Ma
A B
A a B Ma
b BDS under Ma
EI=Constt:
L
A B
Mb
Ma BDS under Mb
EI +
0 L/3 2/3L 0
1 M/EI Loading on the
xLx Ma = MaL conjugate beam for a
2 EI 2EI
single BDS.
MbL
2/3L 2EI L/3 Reaction on the
0 __ 0 Mb conjugate
EI beam.
a
aL/2
a 1 Analogous
EI column
L section.
By choosing a B.D.S. as simple beam under the action of Ma and Mb, we can verify by the use of
conjugate beam method that θb = 0. In this case, we are required to find that how much rotation at end A is
required to produce the required moment Ma. In other words, θa (which is in terms of Ma and Mb can be
considered as an applied load on the analogous column section). The moments computed by using the
P MC
formula ± will give us the end moments directly because in this case Ms diagram will be zero.
A I
So, M = Ms − Mi = 0 − Mi = − Mi.
L
Accompanying moment = θa × ( About centroidal column axis )
2
L
and C= for use in above formula.
2
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 329
P MC
Ma = +
A I
θa EI θa × L × L × 12EI
= + ( Reactions are additive at A and are upwards)
L 2 × 2 × L3
θa EI 3θa EI
= +
L L
4 EI
Ma = θa
L
4 EI
Where = Ka
L
P MC
Mb = ± ( Reactions are subtractive at B)
A I
θa EI 3θa EI
= −
L L
− 2θa EI
=
L
− 2EI
= . θa
L
The (−ve) sign with Mb indicates that it is a (−ve) moment which gives us tension at the top or
compression at the bottom.
Mb 2 1
(COF) a → b Carry−over factor from A to B = = =+
Ma 4 2
EXAMPLE NO. 8:− Determine the stiffness factors at A & at B and the carry-over factors from A to B
and from B to A for the straight members with variable X-sections shown in the figure below..
SOLUTION:−
Draw analogous column section and determine its properties.
A B
2I I 2I
4m 6m 6m
1 1 1 1 rad
A= x6+ x6+ x4
2EI EI 2EI
1 rad
3 6 2 7.73
= + +
EI EI EI B
11 1 A 1 1
Analogous column section
= EI 2EI EI 2EI
Centroidal axis
7.73m 8.27m
0.5 × 63 1 × 63
I = + (0.5 × 6) × (5.27)2 + + (1 × 6) ×
12 12
0.5 × 43
(0.73)2 + + (0.5 × 4) × (5.73)2
12
181.85
I =
EI
Consider loads acting at centroid of analogous column and determine indeterminate moments at A and B.
P MC
Ma = ±
A I
P MC 1 × EI 7.73 × 7.73 × EI
= + = +
A I 11 181.85
EI
Ma = 0.419 EI = 0.419 × 16 , (by multiplying and dividing RHS by L)
L
EI
Ma = 6.71
L
Ka = 6.71
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 331
EI 7.73 × 8.27 × EI 16
Mb = − × (by multiplying and dividing by L)
11 181.85 L
EI
= − 4.17
L
Mb 4.17
(COF)A→B = = = 0.62
Ma 6.71
(COF)A→B = 0.62
Now applying unit radian load at B. This eccentric load can be replaced by a concentric load Plus
accompanying moment.
1 rad
1 rad
8.27
7.73 8.27
EI
Ma = − 4.17
L
Kb = 7.47
Ma 4.17
(COF)b→a Carry−over factor from B to A = =
Mb 7.47
(COF)b→a = 0.56
332 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
SOLUTION:−
Axis of Symmetry w.r.t. geometry
B C
12KN 5I
6m 2I 2I 6m
A D
10m
The term “axis of symmetry” implies that the shown frame is geometrically symmetrical (M.O.I. and
support conditions etc., are symmetrical) w.r.t. one axis as shown in the diagram. The term does not include
the loading symmetry (the loading can be and is unsymmetrical).
B C
12KN 5I
6m 2I 2I 6m
A D
72 kN-m
10m
Ms-diagram
B 5I C
12 kN-m
6m 2I
6m 2I
Force=108
2 EI
36 D
A EI
Ms - Diagram
EI
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 333
Ms
According to our sign convention for column analogy, the loading arising out of negative giving tension
EI
on outside will act upwards on the analogous column section. Sketch analogous column section and place
load.
B C 1
5
y=2.27m 5m 5m
Mxx
x x
3.73m 108
EI Myy
2m
D
A
1 y 1/2
2
A = 1 × 6 × 2 + 1 × 10 = 8
2 5 EI
31.51 4
= m
EI
POINT Ms P/A Mx y My X Mi M=
Ix Iy Ms−Mi
A − 72 − 13.5 − 22.14 − 16.17 − 51.81 − 20.19
B 0 − 13.5 + 13.47 − 16.17 − 16.20 + 16.20
C 0 − 13.5 + 13.47 + 16.17 + 16.14 − 16.14
D 0 − 13.5 − 22.14 + 16.17 − 19.47 + 19.47
Note: Imagine the direction of reaction due to P, Mx and My at all points A, B, C and P. Use
appropriate signs. Repeat the analysis by choosing a different BDS yourself.
EXAMPLE NO. 10:− Analyze the quadrangular frame shown by the method of column analogy.
B 3KN/m
C
5I
6m 2I 2I 6m
A D
10m
3KN/m
B C
150K n-m
A D
30
BDS under loads
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 335
Draw Ms−diagram by parts and then superimpose for convenience and clarity.
150
30 B C C
B 150
150
A
150
D
150
30
3KN/m
150
B C
150
A 150 D
Ms-Diagram
100
2.5
B 75 C
30 For Portion BC
450
bb 10 × 30 300
Ms - Diagram Area = = = = 100
6m n+1 2+1 3
EI
b 10 10
3m X' = = = = 2.5 from B.
n+2 2+2 4
75
A D
10m
Note: As BMD on portions BC and AB are negative the loads equal to their areas will act upwards.
M
Now sketch analogous column section carrying loads arising from contributions.
EI
336 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
100 y
2.25m
C
B
450 1/5
2.275m Mx
X X
6m 0.725m
My
3.725
3m
D
1/2 1/2
10m
Analogus colmun section
y
A = 2 × 6 + × 10 =
1 1 8
(as before)
2 5 EI
1 × 10 × 1 + 2 6 × 1 × 3
5 10 2
y = = 2.275 about line BC (as before)
8
1 3
Ix = 2 × 63 + × 6 × (0.725)2 + 10 × + 10 × × (2.275)2
1 1 1
2 2 5 5
31.51 4
= m (as before)
EI
166.79 4
= m (as before)
EI
Now this eccentric load P and MX and My are placed on column centroid.
Ma = ( Ms− Mi)a
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 337
P Mx y My x
and ( Mi)a = ± ±
A Ix Iy
POINT Ms P/A Mx . y My . x Mi M=
Ix Iy Ms−Mi
A − 150 − 68.75 − 11.32 − 75.69 − 155.76 5.76
B − 150 −68.75 + 6.91 − 75.69 − 137.53 −12.47
C 0 −68.75 + 6.91 + 75.69 13.85 −13.85
D 0 −68.75 −11.32 + 75.69 −4.38 4.38
EXAMPLE NO. 4:− Determine stiffness factors corresponding to each end and carry-over factors in both
directions of the following beam.
SOLUTION:−
A B
5I 2I 4I I 3I
2m 1.5m 2m 1m 2m
4.74m 3.76m
yo
3.32
A=
EI
1 1 1 1
× 2 × 1 + 1 × 1 × 2.5 + × 2 × 4 + × 1.5 × 5.75 + × 2 × 7.5
3 4 2 5
X =
3.32
12.4725
X =
3.32
X = 3.76 m from B.
338 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1 23 1 1 × 13
Iyoyo = × + × 2 × (2.76)2 + + (1 × 1)(2.26)2
3 12 3 12
1. Determination of stiffness factor at A (ka) and carry-over factor from A to B. Apply unit load at
A and then shift it along with moment to centroidal axis of column as shown below:
1 rad
A 8.5m B
1 =
A 4.74 B
4.74 3.76
P MC
Ma = ±
A I
EI EI
=1× + 4.74 × 4.74
3.32 19.53
= 1.45 EI , multiply and divide by L
EI EI
Ma = 1.45 × 8.5 × = 12.33
L L
Ka = 12.33
EI 4.74 × 3.26 × EI
Mb = −
3.32 19.53
EI EI
= − 0.61 EI = − 0.61 × 8.5 × = − 5.19 (multiply and divide by L)
L L
EI
Mb = − 5.19
L
Mb 5.19
(COF)a → b = = = 0.42
Ma 12.33
(COF)a → b = 0.42
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 339
2. Determination of stiffness factor at B (Kb) and carry-over from B to A. Apply a unit load at B and
them shift it along with moment to centroidal axis of column as shown below:
P Mc
Ma = ±
A I
1 rad
A 8.5m B
1 =
A 3.76 B
4.74 3.76
EI 3.76 × 4.74 × EI
Ma = −
3.32 19.53
EI EI
= − 0.61 × 8.5 × = −5.19
L L
P Mc
Mb = ±
A I
EI 3.76 × 3.76 × EI
= +
3.22 19.53
EI
=1..03 EI = 1.03 × × 8.5 , multiply and dividing by L.
L
EI
Mb = 8.76
L
Kb = 8.76
Ma 5.19
(COF)b → a = = = 0.6
Mb 8.76
(COF) b → a = 0.6
340 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
EXAMPLE NO.12:− Analyze the following gable frame by column analogy method.
SOLUTION :−
3 kN/m
B C D 3m
3I 3I
7m
I I
A E
14 m
C
7 .62
B D
73.5 73.5
7
C
B 7.62 D
A E
21 21 A E
B.D.S under loads Ms-diagram
2.8
24.5 24.5
6
C
x
B 6 D
6 2.8
4.7
4.375
A Ms diagram E
EI
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 341
MX = Mc at X = 7m
Mc = 21 × 7 – 1.5 X 72
= 73.5 KN−m
3
Sin θ = = 0.394
7.62
7
Cos θ = = 0.919
7.62
2
P1 = P2 = × 24.5 × 7.62 = 124.46
3
P = P1 + P2 = 248.92
7 7
∫ MX dX = ∫ (21 X − 1.5X2) dX = X2 −
21 1.5 3
X = 343
o 2 3 o
7 7
∫ (MX)X dX = ∫ (21 X2 − 1.5X3)dX = X3 −
21 1.5 4
X
o 3 4 o
1.5
= 7 × 73 − × 74 = 1500.625
4
∫ (MX) X dX 1500.625
X = =
∫ MX dX 343
4.375
Cos θ =
a
4.375 4.375
a= =
Cos θ 0.919
a = 4.76
342 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Now draw analogous column section and place loads on top of it.
124.46
124.46
2.8
3m 6
B 4.7
6
C
2.17 m
D
1/3
X
X
Mx
4.83 m
A
E
1
1
1 × (7.62)3
+2
3 1
× ( 0.394 )2 + (7.62) ( 1.5 + 2.17)2 ,
12 3
bL3
the first term in second square bracket is Sin2θ
12
= 154.17
So Ix ≅ 154 m4
7 × 13
Iy = 2 2
Now
12 + (7 × 1) × 7
1 × (7.62)3
+2
3
× (0.919 )2 + × 7.62 × (3.5)2 ,
1
12 3
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 343
bL3
the first term in second square bracket is Cos2θ
12
=770.16
So Iy ≅ 770 m4
EXAMPLE NO. 13:- Analyze the frame shown in fig below by Column Analogy Method.
10kN
B C
3I
2kN/m 4m
2I 2I
A D
3m
4
MA = 10 x 1.5 + 2 x 4 x
2
MA = 31 KN−m
10 kN
B C
2kN/m
A D
8
31 B.D.S
10
A
8
31 31 D
10
10 10
15 7.5
15 5
,
31 15.5
Ms-diagram Ms diagram
EI
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 345
A = × 4 × 2 + × 3 = 5 m2
1 1
2 3
3 × 1 × 1 + 2 1 × 4 × 2
3 6 2
Y =
5
Y = 1.63 m From line BC
1 3 3
0.5 + 4 + (0.5 × 4) × (0.37)2
3×
1
3 12
Ix = + × 3 × (1.63)2 + 2
12 3 12
= 8.55 m4
4 × 0.53
Iy = × (3)3 + 2 2
1
3 12 + (4 × 0.5) × (1.5)
= 9.83 m4
P1 y
0.5 1.0
B C
1/3
1,63 m
P2
4m
X 0.37 X
P3
2.37 m
I
D
½ ½
y
3m
346 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Point Ms P/A Mx My Mi M
.y .X
(1) Ix Iy (1)+(2) Ms − Mi
(2) (3) + (3)
A − 31 −8.88 − 5.44 − 9.88 − 24.2 − 6.8
B − 15 − 8.88 + 3.74 − 9.88 −15.02 + 0.02
C 0 − 8.88 + 3.74 + 9.88 + 4.74 − 4.74
D 0 − 8.88 − 5.44 + 9.88 − 4.44 + 4.44
EXAMPLE NO. 14:- Analyze the following beam by column analogy method.
SOLUTION :−
Choosing B.D.S as cantilever supported at B
10kN
3kN/m
3I 1.5I I
Ms-diagram
due to u.d.l. only
96
4m 2m 2m
(a)
(b)
6
( c)
24
32 72
1m 96
1.33
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 347
P4=80
1.33
40
MS diagram due to point load.
EI
Slectch analogous column section and determine its properties.
P2 P3
o P6
1.5 2.14
P4 Analogous
1/3 1/1.5 1 column
section
4.78 3.22 1.33
yo
3.21
24 × 4 48 × 4
P1 = + + 24 × 4 = 224 KN. Corresponding to full Ms diagram, due to u.d.l.
3 2
Location of P1 from B
224 × X = 96 × 1.33 + 96 × 2 + 32 × 5
X = 2.14 meters
1
P4 = × 4 × 40 = 80 KN, Corresponding to full Ms diagram due to point load.
2
Note: Area of 32 and its location of Ms diagram due to u.d.l. has been calculate d by formula e used in
moment – area Theorems.
2
− 1.5 X3
2
area (abc) = ∫ MXdX = ∫ −1.5X2 dX = = −4
o 3 o
2
− 1.5 X4
2
∫(MX) X dX = ∫ −1.5X3dX =
o 4 o = − 6
−6
X = = 1.5m from A
−4
4 2
area (bcde) = ∫ (MX) dX = ∫ − 1.5X2dX − ∫ − 1.5 X2 dX
o o
348 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
4 2
X3 X3
= − 1.5 − − 1.5 = − 28
3 o 3 o
4 2
∫ (MX)X dX = ∫ − 1.5 X3dX − ∫ − 1.5 X3dX = − 90
o o
−90
X =
−28
1 1 1 1
P3 = (area bcde) = (28) = 18.67 KN , P2 = area abc = × 4 = 1.33
1.5 1.5 3 3
P4 = 80 KN
P = − P1 + P2 + P3 − P4
= − 284 KN (upward)
Total applied moment = M = − 224 × 1.68− 80 × 1.89 − 18.67 × 1.57 − 1.33 × 33 × 3.28
This total load P and M will now act at centroid of analogous column section.
(1 × 4) × 2 + 2 ×
1
× 5 + × 2 × 7
1
1.5 3
X =
6
= 3.22 from B.
1 × 23
1 × 43 1.5
+
1
+ (1 × 4)(1.22) +
1.5 × 2 (1.78)
2 2
Iyoyo =
12 12
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD 349
1 × 23
3 1
+ + × 2 (3.78)2
12 3
12
= 25.70 m4
P Mc
(Mi)a = ±
A I
= + 32.05 KN-m
(Ms)a = 0
Ma = − 32.05 KN−m
P Mc
(Mi)b = −
A I
= − 100.81
(Ms)b = − 72 − 40 = − 112
Mb = (Ms − Mi)b
= − 112 + 100.81
Mb = − 11.19 KN−m
CHAPTER EI GHT
E
B
F (B,C) Plastic D
f
f C D Stress
AB-Elastic
Stress BC-Yeild points
CD-Plastic Strain flow Elastic
DE-Strainhardening
EF-Failure
A Strain A
Strain
Fig 1: Fig 2:
8.2. Advantages of Plastic Analysis
1. Relatively simpler procedures are involved.
2. Ultimate loads for structures and their components may be determined.
3. Sequence and final mode of failure may be known and the capacity at relevant stages may be
determined.
8.3. Assumptions in Plastic bending
1. The material is homogeneous and isotropic.
2. Member Cross-section is symmetrical about the axis at right angles to the axis of bending.
3. Cross-section which were plane before bending remain plane after bending.
4. The value of modulus of Elasticity of the material remains the same in tension as well as in
compression.
5. Effects of temperature, fatigue, shear and axial force are neglected.
6. Idealized bi-linear stress-strain curve applies.
8.4. Number of Plastic Hinges
“ The number of Plastic Hinges required to convert a structure or a member into a mechanism is
one more than the degree of indeterminacy in terms of redundant moments usually. Thus a determinate
structure requires only one more plastic hinge to become a mechanism, a stage where it deflects and
rotates continuously at constant load and acquires final collapse.
So Mathematically
N = n+ 1
where N = Total number of Plastic hinges required to convert a structure into a mechanism.
and n = degree of indeterminacy of structure in terms of unknown redundant moments.
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD 351
B
< y ∈<∈y = y ∈=∈y = y ∈>∈y = y ∈>>∈y
C C
2D
D 3
D
2
T T
case A: M<My
= y
case B: M=My case C
> y = y ∈>>∈y
case D
Var ious Str ess-str ain distr ibutions
Case A - Stresses and strains are within elastic range.
Case B - Stresses and strains at yield levels only at extreme fibers
Case C - Ingress of yielding within depth of section.
Case D - Full plastification of section.
On the onset of yielding σ = σy and M = My = σy.Z.
On full plastification σ = σy and M = Mp = σy.Zp.
or Zp = ∫A yda (First moment of area about equal area axis).
All compact sections as defined in AISC manual will develop full plastification under increasing
loads realizing Mp. However local buckling of the compression flange before yielding has to be avoided
by providing adequate lateral support and by applying width / thickness checks as was done during the
coverage of subject of steel structures design.
Case B. Str esses and Str ains at yield at extr eme fibr es only.
Consult corresponding stress and strain blocks.
M = Total compression × la = Area × σ × la
where Area = Area in compression (from stress block).
σ = Average compression stress.
la = Lever arm i.e. distance b/w total compressive and tensile forces.
σy + o
=
BD 2
So M
2 2 . 3 D
352 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
In general
M = Cjd or Tjd , where C and T are total compressive and tensile forces respectively
which have to be equal for internal force equilibrium.
Case C: M oment Capacity in Elasto - Plastic r ange. Extreme fibres have yielded and the yielding
ingresses in the section as shown by the stress – distribution.
1 C1
D where
2 2 la1 = lever axis b/w C1 and T1
Z C2 la2 = lever axis b/w C2 and T2
C1 = Av.stress X area of element No.1
la2 la1 C2 = Av-stress acting on element No.2 x
area of element 2.
D Z
2 T2
2
1
T1
y
case C : Stress-Distribution
D−Z
M
2
= [ C1la1 + C2 . la2 ] (A) , la1= Z+
D
2 = +Z
2 2
2
= (σy) B − Z la2 = × Z × 2 = × Z
D 2 4
C1
2 3 3
C2 = σy + o Z . B = σy ZB and so, putting values of C1 , C2 la1 and la2 in equation A above.
2 2
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD 353
= σy . B D Z.B
D 4
M
2 − Z 2 + Z + σy 2 x 3 Z , Simplifying
= σy . B 2
D2 2
M
4 −Z + 3
σy BZ 2
= σy . B
D2 2 2
4 −Z + Z
2
3
= σy . B −
D2 Z 2
Mr , where M r is moment of resistance.
4 3
Mp = M r = σy . B 3D2 − 4Z 2 __
For rectangular section.
12
Calculating on similar lines, Plastic moment for various shapes can be calculated.
B B
D/2 dy
(1)
y1 y
D
(2) y2
dy
2D 2d
3 3
D d
d
π
I = (D4 − d4)
64
I π 2
= Z min = (D4 − d4) .
C 64 D
π
Z min = (D4 − d4)
32D
A
Zp = [ y1 + y2] , putting values. putting values Ay = A 1y1 + A 2y2
2
π 2 2 (D3 − d3) π πD2 2D πd2
(D − d2) 2 ×
2d
= (D2 − d2) y = . − ×
8 3π (D2 − d2) 8 8 3π 8 3π
Zp = D3 − d3 π
(D2 − d2) y = −
D3 d3
6 8 I2 12
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD 355
For I - Section:
B
y
C1
b/2 C2
la
2
D d
la
1 T2
T1
stress strain
distribution distribution
I D
As = Z = and C =
C 2
(BD3 − bd3) (BD3 − bd3)
I = , My = σy . Z = σy , Putting value of Z from (1)
12 6D
I (BD − bd ) 2
3 3
Z = = Mp = C1 la1 + C2 la2
C 12 D
BD3 − bd3
= la1= +
d D-d½
Z (1)
6D 2 2 2 = (D+ d)/2,
la2 = −
D D−d½ d
2 2 × 2= 2
(D − d) (D + d) d d
Mp= σy . B + σy . (B − b)
2 2 2 2
Similarly for T-section, Equilateral Triangle and hollow rectangular section the values of shape-
factor are 1.794, 2.343 and 1.29 respectively. For diamond shape its value is 2.0.
Moment
Kinematic
Theorems.
True
Mp
Static
Theorems.
Curvature.
Typically Σ W. δ = Σ Mp . θ.
In both methods, the last step is usually to check that M < Mp at all sections.
8.14. Values of Collapse loads for differ ent loaded str uctur es.
P
L/2 Mp
4
L
L/2 P
Mp
8
L
W Mp
16
L2
P
2/3L Mp
9
L
L/2 P
Mp
6
L
L P Mp
1
L
W Mp
11.65
L2
Mp
8
L2
L/ P P
3 Mp
6
L
P
L/3 Mp
6
L
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD 359
4 4 B 4 C
A
12 8
First possible beam mechanism for span AB.
/2
1.5
8
3
Real Hinge
Write work equations for all mechanisms and find corresponding Mp values.
M echanism (1)
θ
20 × 4 θ + 20 × 2θ = Mp . θ + Mp.1.5θ + Mp
2
120 θ = 3 Mp θ
Mp = 40 K-ft.
M echanism (2)
20 × 4 θ + 20 × 8 θ = Mp . θ + Mp.3θ + Mp . 2θ
360 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
240 θ = 6 Mp θ
Mp = 40 K-ft
M echanism (3)
20 × 4 θ = Mp. θ + Mp . 2 θ + 0 × θ
80 θ = 3 Mp . θ
Mp = 26.67 K-ft.
Minimum Collapse load or Max. Mp will be the collapse mechanism
So Mp = 40 K-ft.( Corresponding to mechanisms 1 and 2)
8.16. EXAM PL E NO.2:-Find the collapse load for the following continuous beam loaded as shown.
SOL UTI ON: Do elastic analysis by three moment equation to find Mb and Mc. Apply the equation
twice to spans AB and BC and then BC and CD. (In this case, noting symmetry and concluding that
Mb = Mc, only one application would yield results).
2T/m
B C D
A
8m 6m 8m
16 9 16
85.33 36 85.33
4m 3m
(Simple span B.M.D. due to loads)
By using three-moment equation
8 Ma + 2Mb 8 + 6 + Mc 6 = − 6 × 85.33 × 4 − 6 × 36 × 3
I I I I 8 6
Ma = 0 , 34 Mb = 364 So Mb = Mc = 10.70 T − m ( By symmetry)
8.17. Maximum bending moment in a member car r ying UDL
ML W=wL
M
R
A C B
L/2 L/2
R R2
1
ML M
R
Mc Mmax B.M.D
yo
xo zo
Consider a general frame element subjected to Udl over its span alongwith end moments plot BMD.
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD 361
B 2T/m C D
A
8m 6 8m
3.13
0.707
1.707
3.313 θ
(2 × 8) = Mp × 1.707 θ + 0.707 θ Mp + 0
2
So Mp = 10.98 T − m
If in a structure, the number of plastic hinges formed at collapse do not render the structure as
statically determinate it is called a partial collapse.
If in a structure there are two or more mechanisms which give the same value of collapse load
(or collapse load factor λc) then this type of collapse is known as overcomplete collapse.
Step 1:
Draw frame in thickness in two lines i.e., solid lines and broken lines. Solid lines are “ outside”
of frame and broken lines are “ inside” of frame.
Step 2: Nodal moments creating compression on out sides are positive or vice-versa.
Step 3: Hinge cancellation at joints occur when rotations of different signs are considered and
mechanisms are combined.
20
2 5 5 15
3 4
5
1
1. Beam M echanism
Write work equation ( Fig A )
20 λ.5 θ = M2 (− θ) + M3 (2 θ) + M4 (− θ)
100 λ = − M2 + 2M3 − M4 by taking θ as common above. (1)
Remember that wor k is always positive.
putting M2 = Mp M3 = Mp M4 = Mp in equation (1), we have
100 λ = 4 Mp or [λ = 0.04 Mp]
20
2 4
5
3 2
1 5
(a) Beam mechanism of element 2-4
20
5 5
4
2 4 15
+
3
+
1 5
20
5 5
-2
2 15
5
3 2
+
1 5
2. Sway M echanism:
15 λ.5 θ = M1(− θ) + M2 θ + M4 ( − θ) + M5 (θ)
75 λ = − M1 + M2 − M4 + M5 (2)
M1, M2, M4 and M5 are all equal to Mp
75 λ = 4 Mp or [ λ = 0.053 Mp]
3. Combined M echanism:
20 λ . 5 θ + 15 λ . 5 θ = M1 (−θ) + M2 (0) + M3 (2 θ) + M4 ( − 2 θ) + M5 (θ)
175 λ = − M1 + 2M3 − 2 M4 + M5 (3)
all these moments are equal to Mp
175 λ = 6 Mp , [ λ = 0.034 Mp ] or Mp = 29.15 λ.
Keeping in mind the definition of a true mechanism [one giving highest value of Mp in terms of
Pc or lowest value of Pc in terms of Mp or λ ]
Combined mechanism is the true collapse mechanism.
So λc = 0.0343 Mp
It will be a complete collapse if the structure is statically determinate and moment anywhere
does not exceed Mp value since there are n + 1 plastic hinges in the true collapse mechanism
Note: “ M oment checks ar e nor mally applied at those plastic hinge positions which ar e
not included in the tr ue collapse mechanism” . In the true collapse mechanism which is combined
mechanism in this case, moments at points 1, 3, 4 and 5 are equal to Mp, we need to find and check
moment value at point 2 only in this case.
The generalized work equations 1 and 2 in terms of moments may be used for the purpose
alongwith their signs.
100 λ = − M2 + 2M3 − M4 (1)
75 λ = − M1 + M2 − M4 + M5 (2) Noting that λ = 0.0343 Mp
eqn (1) becomes
100 × 0.0343 Mp= − M2 + 2Mp + Mp so M2 = − 0.431 Mp < Mp − O.K.
eqn (2) becomes
75 (0.0343 Mp) = + Mp + M2 + Mp + Mp so M2 = − 0.42755 Mp < Mp − O.K.
Net value of M2 = algebraic sum of equations 1 and 2 as combined mechanism is
combination of case A and case B.
366 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
37.5 12.5
7.5m 3 7.5m 4
2
5m
Mp=80KN-m
1 5
SOL UTI ON: Draw three possible independent collapse mechanisms. Write work equation and find 1, 2,
3, 4 and 5 possible plastic hinge locations.
1. Beam M echanism:
(35.5 λ) 7.5 θ = − M2 θ + M3 2 θ + M4 (−θ)
281.25 λ = − M2 + 2M3 − M4 (1)
moment at 2, 3 and 4 is equal to Mp. so
281.25 λ = 4 Mp (work is always + ve)
or λ = 1.1377
2. Sway M echanism:
(12.5 λ) 5 θ = + M1 (− θ) + M2 (θ) + M4 (−θ) + M5 (θ)
62.5 λ = − M1 + M2 − M4 + M5 (2), Moment at 1,2,4 and 5 is Mp.
4
62.5 λ = 4 Mp or λ = × 80 = 5.12
62.5
λ = 5.12
37.5 37.5
5 5
7.5 7.5 -2
2 4 4 12.5
2
2 3 2
3
+
1 5
3. Combined M echanism:
(37.5 λ) (7.5θ)+ (12.5 λ) (5θ)= M1 (−θ) + M2 × 0 + M3 (2θ) + M4 (−2θ) + M5 (θ)
343.75 λ = − M1 + 2M3 − 2M4 + M5 (3) Moment at 1,3,4 and 5 is Mp
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD 367
6 x 80
343.75 λ = 6 Mp or λ = = 1.396
343.75
λ = 1.396.
Therefore, according to kinematic theorem, beam mechanism containing 3 Plastic hinges (one
less than required) is the collapse mechanism for this frame with 3 redundancies. (N= n+ 1)= 3+ 1= 4
are required.;
Note: In partial or incomplete collapse, only a part of the structure becomes statically
determinate.
Check moments at locations (1) and (5) with λ = 1.1377 , M2 , M3 , M4 = Mp
substituting is eqn (2).
62.5 λ = −M1 + M2 − M4 + M5 or 62.5 (1.1377) = − M1 + Mp + Mp + M5
− 88.937 = M5 − M1 (4) or M1 − M5 = 88.937 (4)
Putting same values in eqn (3)
343.75 (1.137) = − M1 + 2Mp + 2Mp + M5
= − M1 + M5 + 4 × 80
70.84 = M5 − M1 (5)
Values of M1 and M5 cannot be found from either of equations (4) and (5) as this is incomplete
or partial collapse. Instead of a unique answer on values of M1 and M5 which do not violate yield
criteria, different pairs of possible values of M1 and M5 can be obtained satisfying equations 4 and 5.
Therefore, according to Uniqueness theorem beam mechanism is the true collapse mechanism. It is a
partial collapse case.
36 24
3m 3 3m 4
2
63
6m 42 42 Mp
1 5
SOL UTI ON: Sketch possible independent collapse mechanisms. Notice that locations where beam and
column meets, plastic huge is formed in weaker member near the joint.
368 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
36
3
2 4
3 2
6( + )
36
6 5
3 3 +2 )
2 24
+
2 4
3 -2
2
+
1 5 -( + ) +( + )
(c) Combined mechanism (d) Another Combined mechanism
(a + b) (b+c)
(36λ) 3φ = − M2 φ + M3 (2φ) − M4 φ
108 λ = − M2 + 2M3 − M4 (1) All are equal to respective Mp. Putting values.
108 λ = 42 + 2 x 63 + 42
λ = 1.944
(36 λ)3φ+ 24λ (θ+ φ)6= M1 (−θ −φ)+ M2 (θ)+ M3 (2φ) + M4 (θ + 2φ) + M5 (θ + φ) φ ≅ θ
396 λ = − M1 + M2 + 2M3 − 2M4 + 2M5
396 λ = 2(42) + 42 + 2(63) + 3 x 42 + 2 x 42
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD 369
462
λ = = 1.166
396
λ = 1.166.
Note: In overcomplete collapse, more than one mechanism give the same value of collapse load
factor. Any or both of the collapse mechanisms can contain extra number of plastic hinges than those
required for complete collapse. So in this case fig c and d mechanisms give the same value. This was
the case of over complete collapse.
CHAPTER NI NE
= +
An indeterminate beam under applied loads and redundant moments is equated to corresponding
detemrinate system carrying these two effects separately. Let-us derive the three-moment equation.
Consider a generalized two-span beam element under the action of applied loads and redundant
support moments acting on BDS.
370 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
A/ C/
ha A1 hc
θb B
A C
θb
Fig (a)
C1
Tangent at B
I1 I2
L1 L1
BMD due to A1 A2
Fig (b)
applied loads
on simple spans
a1 a2
Mb
Ma A4 A5 Mc
Generalized
redundant moment A3 A6 Fig ( c)
diagram
L1/3 L2/3
2/3 L1 2/3 L2
Fig(a) is an indeterminate beam subjected to applied load (udl in this case) which has shown
settlement such that support B is at a lower elevation than support at A and C and difference of elevation
w.r.t intermediate support B is ha and hc. The angle θB on either side of support B must be equal. Fig(b)
is B.M.D. due to applied load on simple spans where A 1 is Area of B.M.D. on span L 1 and A 2 is area of
B.M.D. on span L 2. a1 and a2 are the locations of centroids of B.M.D’ s on L 1 and L 2 from left and right
supports respectively. So invoking continuity of slopes and knowing that for small angels θ = tanθ.
AA 1 CC1
=
L1 L2
THE THREE MOMENT EQUATION 371
AA 1 = AA / − A 1A /
1
+ A 4 × L 1
L1 2
= ha − A 1a1 + A 3 ×
EI 1 3 3
1
× MaL 1 + L 1 × MbL 1
L1 1 2 1
AA 1 = ha − A 1a1+
EI 1 3 2 3 2
CC1
Now evaluate on similar lines. We have from geometry
L2
1
A 2a2 + A 5 × L 2 + A 6 × − hc
2 L2
=
EI 2 3 3
1
× MCL 2 − hc
2 1 L2 1
CC1 = A 2a2 + L 2 × MbL 2 +
EI 2 3 2 3 2
1
+ MC − hc divide by L 2
L 22 L 22
= A 2a2 + Mb
EI 2 3 6
CC1 1 A 2a2 Mb L 2 MC L 2 hc
= + + − (2)
L2 EI 2 L 2 3 6 L2
ha
−
1 A 1a1 + Ma L 1 + Mb L 1 = 1 A 2a2 + Mb L 2 + Mc L 2 − hc
L 1 EI 1 L1 6 3 EI 2 L 2 3 6 L2
372 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Ma
L 1 L 1 L 2 L 2 6 A 1a1 6 A 2a2 6 Eha 6 Ehc
I 1 + 2Mb I 1 + I 2 + Mc I 2 = − I 1L 1 − I 2L 2 + L 1 + L 2
The above equation is called three-moment equation.
12 KN 32 KN
A B 9.6 KN/m C D
3m
Do
Lo
2m 6m 8m 6m Io =
2Ic 4Ic 2Ic Lo
Fig (a)
2
9.6 x 8 32 x 6
= 76.8 = 48
8 4
BMD
A1 = 0 A2 A3
Fig (b)
4m 3m
409.6 144
The same has already been done in Fig(a). Fig (b) is the BMD’ s on simple spans, their Areas
and its locations.
Apply three-moment equation to spans AB and BC at a time. We have
6 × 409.6 × 4
Ma
6 6 8 8
2Ic + 2Mb 2Ic + 4Ic + Mc 4Ic = − 6 × 0 − 4Ic × 8
We have obtained three equations from which three-Unknowns Mb, Mc and MD can be calculated.
Subtract equation (2) from (1)
Mb + 0.2 Mc = − 23.52
Mb + 4 Mc + MD = − 225.625
− 3.8 Mc − MD = 202.105 (4)
Multiply equation (4) by (2) and add in equation (3)
− 7.6 Mc − 2MD = 404.21
Mc + 2 MD = − 72
− 6.6 MC = 332.21
So Mc = − 50.3 KN-m
Checks:
The above calculated values of moments are correct if they satisfy the continuity of slope
requirements. Slopes at any intermediate support point can be calculated from the two adjacent spans by
using conjugate beam method. While applying checks, it is assumed that reader is well conversant with
the conjugate beam method. Before we could apply checks, it is necessary to plot reactant moment
diagram (support-moments) to get their contribution in slope calculation. Here is the statement of
conjugate beam theorem number one again.
M
“ The shear force at any point on the conjugate beam loaded with diagram is the slope at the
EI
corresponding point in the actual beam carrying applied loads.” In applying the conjugate -beam method,
we must use the original sign convention for shear force as applied in strength of Materials subject. (i.e.,
“ left up, right-down, positive)
374 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
2m 6m 8m 6m
A4 A6 A8
A B C D
O O
A5 13.45 10.85
24
A7 A9
Fig ( c)
BMD divided into convenient shapes.
50.3
Checks. SPAN AB
1 − 80.7 2
− × 31.65
1 A4 2
S.F at A = θa = − − A5 =
EI 2 3 2EIc 2 3
30.725
θa = − (There is no check on this value as, it is not a continuous support)
EIc
25.45
= Clockwise.
EIc
SPAN BC
1 A2 A6 1 1 409.6 107.3 1
θb = − − A7 = − − × 147.5
4EIc 2 2 3 4EIc 2 2 3
25.46
θb = Clockwise
EIc
THE THREE MOMENT EQUATION 375
1 − A2 A6 2 1 − 409.6 107.3 2
θc = + + A7 = + + × 147.5
4EIc 2 2 3 4EIc 2 2 3
− 13.18
θc =
EIc
SPAN CD
13.16
θc = −
EIc
θD = 0 (Fixed end)
All slope values have been satisfied. This means calculated support moment values are correct.
Now beam is statically determinate we can construct SFD and BMD very easily. We have seen that
numerical values of E and I are required in this case only if one is interested in absolute values of θ.
However, these values are required while attempting a support settlement case. Determine reactions and
plot SFD and BMD.
376 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
12 KN 32 KN
A B 9.6 KN/m C D
3m
2m 6m 8m 6m
33.79 26.194 KN
1.76
O o
SFD 5.806
12 3.52m
43.009
BMD
13.44 10.856
-24
50.308
EXAM PL E-2: Analyze the continuous beam shown below by three moment equation if support at B
sinks by 12 mm. Take E = 20 × 106 KN/m2; Ic = 40 × 10-6 m4.
A B C D
Do
12mm
6m 8m 6m Lo
2Ic 4Ic 3Ic Io =
/
B
2.0 A3 0.8
A A1
A2 C
O O
A4 A5
Fig (b) -1.6
Reactant moment diagram
A1 to A5 are areas of adjusted BMD.
THE THREE MOMENT EQUATION 377
Spans AB and BC
When we consider these spans and compare them with the derivation, we find that situation is
similar so both ha and hc terms are positive and equal to 12 mm using three-moment equation.
6E × 12 × 10-3 6E × 12 × 10−3
Ma
6
+ 2Mb
8
+ Mc =
6 8
+ +
2Ic 2Ic 4Ic 4Ic 6 8
put EI = 800
Spans BC and CD
Comparing these two spans with the derivation, we notice that ha term is equal to − 12mm and
hc term is zero.
6E(− 12 × 10-3)
Ma
8
+ 2Mc
6
+ Md =
8 6
+ + 0
4Ic 4Ic 3Ic 3Ic 8
2 Mb + 8 Mc + 2 Md = − 7.2 divide by 2
Mb + 4 Mc + Md = − 3.6 (2)
There is no load and settlement on these two spans so right handside of equation is zero
Mc
6 6 Lo Lo
3Ic + 2Md 3Ic + ∞ + Mdo ∞ = 0
378 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Lo
We know that Mdo = 0; = 0
∞
2 Mc + 4 Md = 0 divide by 2
Mc + 2 Md = 0 (3)
Above three linear simultaneous equations which are solved. Subtract (2) from (1)
Mb + 0.2 Mc = 1.68
Mb + 4 Mc + Md = − 3.6
− 3.8 Mc − Md = 5.26 (4)
− 7.6 Mc − 2 Md = 10.56
Mc + 2 Md = 0
− 6.6 Mc = 10.56
Mc = − 1.6 KN-m
Mc
Md = − = + 0.8
2
Mb = 2 KN-m
Plot end moment diagram. Add and subtract equal areas on spans BC and CD and apply
conjugate beam method.
1
A1 = ×6×2= 6
2
1
A2 = ×8×2= 8
2
1
A3 = × 6 × 0.8 = 2.4
2
1
A4 = × 8 × 1.6 = 6.4
2
1
A5 = × 6 × 1.6 = 4.8
2
Compute slopes at supports.
12 × 10−3 1 2 12 × 10−6 1 2
θb = + − A1 = + − × 6
6 2EIc 3 6 1600 3
= -5 × 10−4 rad.
Span BC
12 × 10−3 1 2 12 × 10−3
A2 − A4 = 2 × 8 − 1 × 6.4
1 1
θb = + +
8 4EIc 3 3 8 4 × 800 3 3
θb = − 5 × 10−4 rad.
12 × 10−3 1 1
− A2 + A4
2
θc = +
8 4EIc 3 3
θc = − 1 × 10−3 rad.
Span CD
1 1
A3 − A5 = 1 × 2.4 − 2 × 4.8
2 1
θc = 0 +
3EIc 3 3 3 × 800 3 3
θc = −1 × 10−3 rad.
1 2
− A3 + A5 = 0 + −2 × 2.4 + 1 × 4.8
1 1
θd = 0 +
3EIc 3 3 3 × 800 3 3
θd = 0 (Fixed end)
Checks on slopes have been satisfied so computed moment values are correct. Now beam is
determinate. SFD and BMD can be plotted.
Resolve same problem, for a differential sinking of 12 mm at support C. we get the following equations.
Solution gives
Mc = + 3.49
Md = − 4.145
Mb = − 1.418
Unsolved Examples:
Solve the following loaded beams by three-moment equations.
380 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
70 KN
3m
A B C
8m 12m
EI = Constt.
Final equations:
Ma + 0.5 Mb = − 90.312 (1)
Ma + 5 Mb + 1.5 Mc = − 213.12 (2)
Mb + 2 Mc = 0 (3)
B C D
6m 12m 6m
3Ic 10Ic 2Ic 1.5 m
Final Equations:
2 Ma + Mb = − 216 (1)
2 Ma + 6.4 Mb + 1.2 Mc = − 1555.2 (2)
1.2 Mb + 8.4 Mc = − 1495.2 (3)
End moment values:
Ma = − 0.361 KN-m
Mb = − 215.28 Kn-m
Mc = − 147.25 Kn-m
A B C D
6m 12m 6m
Final Equations:
2 Ma + Mb = − 600 (1)
2 Ma + 6.4 Mb + 1.2 Mc = 1800 (2)
THE THREE MOMENT EQUATION 381
15 KN 3 KN/m 20 KN
A B C
5m 8m 8m 3m
2I I I 2I
12 KN 9.6 KN/m 32 KN
2m A B C 3m D
6m 8m 6m
2I 4Ic 3Ic
Final equations:
10 Mb + 2 Mc = − 235.2 (1)
2 Mb + 8 Mc = − 451.2 (2)
12 KN 9.6 KN/m 32 KN
2m A B C 3m D
6m 8m 6m
2I 4Ic 3Ic
382 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Final equations:
10 Mb + 2 Mc = − 235.2 (1)
2 Mb + 8 Mc + 2 MD = − 451.2 (2)
2 Mc + 4 MD = − 144 (3)
A B C 3m D
4.5 mm
2m 6m 8m 6m
2Ic 4Ic 3Ic
Final equations:
10 Mb + 2 Mc = 6.3 (1)
2 Mb + 8 Mc + 2 Md = − 2.7 (2)
2 Mc + 2 MD = 0 (3)
64 KN
A 3 3m B C
9m
EI = Constt.
Final equations:
2 Ma + Mb = − 144 (1)
2 Ma + 10 Mb + 3 Mc = − 288 (2)
Mb + 2 Mc = 0 (3)
Mb = -19.2
Mc = 9.6
Ma = − 62.4
A B C 3m D
3 mm
4.5 mm
E = 200 x 106 KN/m2
-6 4
Ic = 400 x 10 m
6m 8m 6m
2Ic 4Ic 3Ic
Final equations:
Mb + 0.2 Mc = 5.4 (1)
Mb + 4 Mc + MD = − 1.5 (2)
Mc + 2 MD = − 12 (3)
CHAPTER TEN
P
X
A B
l
I.L.D. for Ma
L
Ma = − P (L − X) 0< X < L
Minus sign with P shows a negative moment at A for all load positions (consider sign
convention for moments)
384 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
wdX
b
w
A
L-X X
dX
y
L
b b
Ma = ∫ WydX = w ∫ ydX
o o
b
Where ∫ ydX is area of I.L.D between limits zero to b.
o
10.2. I nfluence L ines for beam Reactions:
ILD’ s for reactions in case of simple beams and compound beams (determinate beams resting
over several supports) can be drawn by using the already described procedure. Consider a simple beam
with a single load sitting at any moment of time as shown
From statics it can be shown that
P
X
A B
L
PX P(L - X)
Ra = Rb =
L L
X/L
l
yi I.L.D. for Ra
(L - X)
L
yi l
I.L.D. for Rb
L − X
and Rb = P
PX
Ra = 0< X < L
L L
INFLUENCE LINES 385
/
A
P
X
y
A B
L
Ra
Ra × AA / − Py = 0 (Force × displacement)
Py
So Ra = where y is the displacement due to Ra under P.
AA /
If AA / = 1, Ra = Py A result already obtained.
This procedure of drawing ILDs’ is more useful for the complicated cases.
10.4. Reactions for Compound Beams:
A beam resting over several supports which has been made determinate by the availability of
inserted hinges at suitable points is called a compound beam. The following Rules must be kept in mind
while constructing ILD’ s for such cases.
1. Points of I.L.D corresponding to supports should show zero displacement except where
virtual displacement is given (in case of reactions).
2. Portion of the beam between hinges which are straight before virtual displacements should
remain straight after virtual displacement.
3. If a beam is continuous over two consecutive support and there is a hinge after these two
supports, that portion of beam behaves a unit in case the virtual displacement is given
elsewhere.
4. Portions of beam between pins which is straight before virtual displacement, shall remain
386 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
A F B G C H D E
I +
I. L. D for Ra
+ I
I. L. D for Rb
+ I
I. L. D for Rc
+ I
+
I. L. D for Rd
+ I
+
I. L. D for Re
If positive areas of above diagrams are loaded, upward reactions at corresponding support will
occur or vice-versa.
Construct Influence lines for reactions for the following compound beam by virtual
displacements.
INFLUENCE LINES 387
A G B H C I D E J F
I +
I. L. D for Ra
+ I
I. L. D for Rb
+ I
I. L. D for Rc
I +
+
I. L. D for Rd
I +
+
I. L. D for Re
I. L. D for R f
Evaluation of maximum upward and down reaction due to concentrated loads and udl can be
done by using the basic principles described already.
If several moving loads, from right to left direction, approach left hand support of a simple
beam, the left reaction continues to increase and becomes maximum till leading wheel is at the left
support. This corresponding first maxima will decrease immediately if the load falls off and leaves the
span from left upon further advance, reaction at left support will start increasing and will become
maximum again when second wheel is at the left support. So there will be as many maxima as is the
number of loads.
Evaluation of reactions due to live load udl is rather simple as the span portion required to be
loaded for maximum upward and downward support reactions are obvious by the simple inspection. Of
course positive areas if loaded will give maximum upward reactions and vice-versa.
388 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
P
X
C
A B
a b
Ra Rb
For all load positions to right of point C, the shear force for at C (Vc) is equal to + Ra.
Vc = Ra
It means that for load position between point B and C, the Shape of ILD for SF at C will be the
same as the shape of ILD for + Ra.
For all load positions to left of point C, the shear force at C (Vc) is equal to − Rb.
Vc = − Rb
It means that for load position between point A and C, the shape of ILD for SF at C will the
same as shape of ILD for −Rb. Knowing that positive ILD is drawn above the reference line and negative
ILD is drawn below the reference line, we obtain the ILD for Vc as shown below with the help of ILD’ s
for reactions (+ Ra1 − Rb)
P
X
C
A B
a b
L
Ra Rb
I. L. D. for + Ra
l b/L + I. L. D. for Vc
a/L l
I. L. D. for - Rb
INFLUENCE LINES 389
Mathematically
PX
Ra = 0< X < L
L
(L − X)
Rb = P 0< X < L
L
Pb b
At X= 0, load is at B and Vc is zero. At x= b, load is at C and Vc = + Ra = or if P= 1.
L L
a b
The ordinates and can be obtained by using similar triangles. Now inspect the ILD for Vc.
L L
For a right to left advance of load system, Vc keeps on increasing till the “ leading load is at the
section” , when leading load just crosses the section, Vc drops by the magnitude of load and this process
continues. So we can write that for maximum SF at a section, “ the load should be at that section” . This
is the first criterion of calculation of Vmax. Now the question comes to mind that which load among the
moving load system should be placed at the section? To address this question, we have noted, that change
in SF at a section, ∆V, is equal to change in Ra (∆Ra) minus the load leaving the Section. (Pn)
So, ∆V = ∆Ra − Pn
If W is sum of all the loads on the span L before advance of a, it can be shown that
Wa
∆Ra =
L
Wa
So, ∆V = − Pn
L
Any load which reverses this expression, should be brought back and placed at that section to
realize the maximum SF at that section. So a change in the sign of above expression can be regarded as
the second criterion for maximum shear force at a section.
It can also be shown that loads entering or leaving the span as a result of any particular advance
do not affect the above expression very significantly.
The above method is called the statical method. The same shape of ILD for Vc can be obtained
by virtual displacement method also.
C
A B
a b
V V
Ra L Rb
b/L + I. L. D. for Vc
a/L
390 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
Now imagine that resistance to vertical displacement at C has been destroyed (imagine a sort of
cut at the section) and the vertical shear force as shown (opposite to sign convention for positive shear
force). The area enclosed between the original position before virtual displacement and the deformed
position after virtual displacement is the ILD for Vc.
10.6. I nfluence L ine Diagr ams for Bending M oment:
Again we consider the simple beam under the action of a simple moving load as shown. Let it be
required to construct ILD for Mc.
P
X
C
A B
a b
L
Ra Rb
xb
Rb
fo r
ILD
b
ILD for R
axa
a
+ ab/L
I. L. D. for Mc
It means that for portion BC, the shape of ILD for Mc is the same as the shape of ILD for Ra
multiplied by distance a.
If the load is between points A and C
P(L − X)
Mc = Rb × b = ×b b< X < L
L
At X = b, load is at C; , Mc = Rb × b
Pab ab
So Mc = = if P = 1
L L
INFLUENCE LINES 391
It means that for portion AC, the shape of ILD for Mc is the same as the shape of ILD for Rb
multiplied by b.
At X = L;
Load at A; Mc = 0
The same shape of ILD for Mc can be obtained by virtual displacements also.
P
X
C
A B
a b
Ra Rb
b
M M
a
y I. L. D. for Mc
M M
dx
So, if δθ = 1; the moment at Section C for a single load system will be load multiplied by
corresponding influence ordinate (influence co-efficient) while constructing ILD’ s by virtual
displacements, loads are not considered. Now construct ILD for Mc by virtual displacements.
At Section C, we imagine that the beam resistance to moments which produce rotations has been
destroyed while resistance to shear and axial loads is intact. This situation is obtained by considering that
at Section C; there is a sort of hinge (one degree of freedom system). On this hinge the moments are
392 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
applied on two sides of hinge as shown alone. The segments of beam rotate and the displaced beam
position is ILD for Mc.
The one-degree of freedom system such as a hinge is further explained in diagrams shown which
illustrate the movement. This procedure can now be applied to more complicated cases where statical
approach may be laborious.
The method of virtual displacements can be applied to more complicated cases like compound
beams etc., by considering the basic ideas established in this chapter.
1 2 3
A E B C F D
1 2 3
ILD for M1 - 1 +
ILD for M2 - 2 + +
ILD for M3 - 3 +
In case of a simple beam supporting a moving load system, the maximum moment at a section is
obtained when
1. One of the loads is at the section.
2. In case of several moving loads, that load shall be placed at the Section, for producing
maximum moment at that Section, which reverses the average loading on two portions of
span adjacent to Section.
INFLUENCE LINES 393
2. For this position of loads find the position of resultant of all loads on span.
3. Move the system slightly so that mid-span is bisected by the resultant of all loads on span
and the load which gives us maximum bending moment at mid-span.
4. Find absolute maximum bending moment. It will occur under displaced position of that
load which gave us maximum bending moment at mid-span.
Considering that invariably loads would be magnified for design purpose and appreciating that
the numerical difference between the values of maximum mid-span bending moment and absolute
maximum bending moment is insignificant, evaluation of absolute maximum bending moment for a given
moving load system appears to be of theoretical interest only. How interested students can evaluate it for
only moving load system by considering the above four points and guidelines contained in this chapter.
10.9. Gir der s with Floor beams (Panelled gir der s)
Normally in bridge construction, moving loads are hardly applied to the main girders directly
but instead following arrangement is used for the load transfer.
The moving load system comes on the stringers which transfer it to the main girder through
floor beams in form of concentrated loads (Reactions of floor beams). So main girder is subjected to
concentrated loads only. For large spans the main girder may be of steel, poured in-situ reinforced
concrete or pre-stressed concrete. Points a, b, c, …. F are called panel points and the distance between
any two panel points is called a panel.
With the above mentioned load-transfer mechanisms, it can be easily seen that ILD’ s for main
reactions remain same as that for a simple beam as discussed already.
394 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
As there will be no load on the main girder except floor beam reactions, it is stated that for a
given load position, the shear force within a panel remains constant so we can talk of shear force in
panels rather that shear force at a section (panel and becomes a section). Let us now construct ILD’ s
for shear force for various panels of girder already shown.
INFLUENCE LINES 395
(+)
(-)
I ILD for Vef
ILD for + Ra
ILD for - Rb
0.4
(+)
ILD for Vcd
(-)
I
0.4
ILD for - Rb
d x 4d b
bx
5d for R
IL D
ILD fo
r Ra x
a
b
3a/5
b/5
a
6 2d x 3d
d =
5 5d
ILD for Mc
A five panels main girder is shown for which various ILD’ s have been sketched.
396 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
10.14. I L D for M mn
Section mn is located within panel bc. Same technique can be applied for constructing ILD for
M mn. If load P is to right of panel point C.
M mn = Ra × a.
It means that if load is between points c and f, the shape of ILD for M mn will be the same as
shape of ILD for Ra multiplied by a. If load P is to left of panel point b, then.
M mn = Rb × b.
It means that if load is between points a and b, then shape of ILD for M mn will be the same as
shape of ILD for Rb multiplied by b. Now consider load within panel bc with P acting at a distance
X from c.
PX P(d − X)
Pb = and Pc = 0 < X < d.
d d
PX P(d − X)
then M mn = Pb yb + Pc yc = yb + yc 0 < X < d.
d d
So between the panel, the moment varies linearly. Therefore joing the ordinates of ILD for M mn
at b and c by a straight line, we complete the ILD for M mn.
Now it is understood that SF is generally maximum near the support while moment is generally
maximum near the mid-span. So ILD for M mn can also be used to evaluate corresponding maxima. If
criteria of maximum bending moment is applied at a section corresponding to bigger ordinate, then
(M mn)max can be calculated for a moving load system.
10.15. I L D for M c
At the panel points, the load is directly transmitted to the main girder and the panel girder
behaves as a simple beam at the panel points. So ILD for Mc will be drawn considering the girder as a
simple beam.
1 D
4
2
θ
θ
h
3
A
G C F E B
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(+)
I L D for S1
When a moving load system traverses the bottom chord of this trussed bridge, it is known that
forces in top chord members will be compressive in nature while that in bottom chord will be tensile in
nature. The forces in chord members are a function of moment divided by truss height. For a chord
member take “ moment at the point where other two members completing the same triangle meet divided
by height of truss.” This has already been established in this book when discussing method of moments
and shears. So applying this S1 is a compressive force, so assigned a negative sign, equal to moment at C
divided by the height of truss. So considering the truss as a simple beam, draw an ILD for Mc and divide
it by the height of Truss. (S1)max can be evalutated by applying the criteria of maximum bending moment
(Average loadings) at point C considering the truss as a simple beam.
INFLUENCE LINES 399
I L D for S3
It is a tensile force equal to moment at D divided by height of Truss. (S3)max can be evalauted by
applying the criteria of maximum bending moment at point D.
I L D for S2
±V
It is known that axial force in an inclined member is . Minus before Cosθ shall be taken
± Cosθ
if the angle “ between inclined member and vertical” is counterclockwise. Now if the load is right of D,
SF applicable to member 2 is + Ra. So corresponding portion of ILD for + Ra is taken. This is divided
by − Cosθ. If the load is to left of C, SF applicable to member 2 is − Rb. So corresponding portion of
ILD for − Rb is taken. This is again divided by − Cosθ. In between the panel SF varies linearly so we
can join the corresponding points.
The shape of ILD for S2 resembles with the shape of ILD for intermediate panel shear in a
panelled girder. So (S2)max can be evaluated by applying the criteria of maximum intermediate panel
shear.
I L D for S4
If the load is at E or right of E, Force in member 4 is zero and if load is at or to left of point C,
again the force in member 4 is zero. If the load is at F, the same will be the tensile force in member.
Using these boundary conditions, ILD for S4 is constructed. Now inspect its shape. It resembles with the
shape of ILD for moment at F (or D) in an equivalent simple beam of span CE. So (S4)max can be
evaluated by applying the criteria of maximum bending moment (average loading criteria) at F (or D).
10.17. I nfluence lines for moment and hor izontal thr ust in a thr ee hinged ar ch.
µc
We know that H = and
yc
Mx = µx − Hy.
Where y will be the rise of arch at a distance X from origin (usually a support).
400 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
y yc
A x B
H H
L
L
Va 4yc Vb
(+)
ILD for H
x(L - x) Ly
L 4yc
(-)
(+) Shaded area
(+)
ILD for Mx
Influence line for any structural effect can be drawn by following the formula for that structural
effect.
10.17.1. I L D for hor izontal thr ust H
Horizontal thrust H is developed at the springings (supports) of an arch. Examine the formula
µc
for H H = . So ILD for H will be obtained if ILD for moment at centre is drawn, considering the
yc
L
arch to be a simple bam, and is then divided by yc. The peak ordinate of ILD for H will be . (H)max
µyc
due to a moving load system can be obtained by applynig the criteria of maximum bending moment at the
centre.
10.17.2. I L D for M oment in the ar ch
From the Eddy’ s theorem we know that bending moment in the arch at a distance x from
support is
M x = µx − Hy
where µx = simple span bending moment at a distance X.
INFLUENCE LINES 401
So as a first step, we construct ILD for simple span bending moment at a distance X. Then we
subtract the ILD for Hy. The net area between these two diagrams is the ILD for moment in the arch as
shown.
10.18. Standar d L eadings
For the design of Railway bridges standard Cooper’ s E-60 and E-72 loadings consisting of two
locomotives each weighing 213 tons on 18 axles each followed by infinite udl representing compartments
is considered. Structural affects obtained for a E loading can be used to get the same for another E
loading by simply multiplying them with the ratio of E loadings.
Original E-60 or E-72 loadings are in kip-ft. system as follows:
3/ft
15 30 30 30 30 4 of 19.5 15 4 of 30 4 of 19.5
↓ 8/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 9/ ↓ 5 ↓ 6 ↓ 5 ↓ 8/ ↓ 8/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 9/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 6/ ↓ 5/ ↓ 5/
Above wheel loads are in kips per rail or tonnes per track. (1 Ton = 2 Kips ; small ton)
Converting E-72 loading in SI Units we have IK = 5 KN approximately.
80 KN 4 of 160 KN 4 of 104 KN 80
↓ 2.44 ↓ 1.52 ↓ 1.52 ↓ 1.52 ↓ 1.52 ↓ 2.74 ↓ 1.52 ↓ 1.83 ↓ 1.52 ↓ 2.44 ↓ 2.44
0.80
(+)
(-)
0.6 0.80
(+)
0.2
3.52 2.44 1.52 1.52 1.52 2.74 1.52 1.83 1.52 2.44 2.44 1.52 1.52 1.52 2.44 1.52 1.83 1.52 1.52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8.6 m
0.8
y4
y19 = 0.191
load which produces reversal after advance should be brought back and placed at section e for (Vef)max.
Evaluation of (Vbc)max
4 of 160 4 of 104 4 of 160 4 of 104
80KN 80
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
0.6
y14
y4 y5
c
+
d y18
a b y1 e
f
(-)
ILD for Vbc 0.82m
I.L.D for Vbc
0.2
2.25 6.75m
Once loads are advanced from right to left at C, the following criteria shall be used to evaluate
maximum intermediate panel shear (Vbc)max
W W/
>
L d
Portion bc portion cf
80 2064
< after 1st advance.
9 45
240 2168
< after 2nd advance
9 45
400 2272
< after 3rd advance
9 45
560 2315.46
> after 4th advance.
9 45
So maximum positive SF in panel bc will be obtained when 3rd wheel of 160 KN is placed at
point c. Now place loads as shown above and determine corresponding ordinates of ILD. Multiply loads
and ordinates by giving due care to signs of ILD, we obtain (Vbc)max.
Now from similar triangles, influence co-efficients y1,...... y18 are:
y1 = 0.113 y2 = 0.33 y3 = 0.465
y4 = 0.6 y5 = 0.566 y6 = 0.505
y7 = 0.472 y8 = 0.431 y9 = 0.397
y10 = 0.343 y11 = 0.289 y12 = 0.255
y13 = 0.221 y14 = 0.187 y15 = 0.126
INFLUENCE LINES 405
(Vbc)max = 720.34 KN
EXAM PL E NO.2: Determine the maximum bending moment at a cross-section 9.1m from left hand for
a beam of span 27.3m. The moving live load is 117 KN/m having a length of 6m.
Now let us assume that the given position of Udl gives us(Mc)max at a distance X from C as
shown. Determine Ra for this position
∑Mb = 0
Ra = 390.84 + 25.71 X
117 X 2
Moment at C = Mc = Ra × 9.1 −
2
117 X 2
Mc = (390.84 + 25.71) 9.1 −
2
Simplify
If BM at C is maximum, then
d Mc
= Vc = 0
dX
233.96 X − 2 × 58.5 X = 0
X = 2m
18.2 y1
= → y1 = 4.733 m
27.3 7.1
9.1 y2
= → y2 = 4.733 m
27.3 14.2
1
= 117 (6 × 4.733 + × 6 × 1.327)
2
= 3788.3 KN-m
INFLUENCE LINES 407
EXAM PL E NO. 3:
Calculate maximum bending moment at Section mn and pq of a five panel bridge. Each panel is
of 9m.
Five loads of 160 KN each spaced at 1.52m travel from right to left.
8.1
6.3
y1 y4
y2 y3
5 of 160
9 9
Evaluation of (M mn)max
It is recommended that criteria of maximum bending moment be applied at maximum ordinate of
8.1 corresponding to Panel point C. Now comparing average loadings on portion ac and cf, we find that
3rd load reverses the criterion as it crosses. So it must be placed at point C. Determine ordinates
408 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
8.1 y3
= → y3 = 7.644, y4 = 7.188, y1 = 6.3 + 1.496 = 7.796
27 25.48
y2 = 6.3 + 1.192 = 7.492
(M mn)max = 160 (7.492 + 7.796 + 8.1 + 7.644 + 7.188) = 38.22 × 160
= 6115.2 KN-m
The reader is also suggested to calculate (Mmn)max. by coinciding the resultant of moving load
system with the maximum ordinate. Place the loads accordingly. Compute influence co-efficients and
multiply loads with respective ordinates to compute (Mmn)max. Compare this value with the previous one.
(M pq)max
As ILD for Mpq is symmetrical about centre-line (mid span), Arrange the loads such that the
resultant falls on mid-span. All five loads shall be accommodated and will have an ordinate of 9.
(M pq)max = 160 (9 + 9 + 9 + 9 + 9) = 7200 KN-m
I mpor tant:
The instructor is advised to work with lesser number of loads, usually five to seven, in the class
and Establish the procedure. The students can then be given assignments involvinig standard trains etc.,
for clarification of their concepts.
EXAM PL E NO. 4:
A simple beam has a clear span of 27.5 m. Construct ILD for SF at a section 6.1m from left
support. How should Coopers-E-60 loading be placed to calculate maximum shear force at this section?
SOL UTI ON:
Draw ILD for Vc. Advance the loads at section C. We shall show the load position required for
(Vc)max only.
A C B
6.1 m 21.4 m
0.778
y9
y12
y2 ( + )
y1
(-) ILD for Vc
0.222
In order to have (Vc)max, at least one load should be at C. To decide which load should be placed
at C, reversal in the sign of following equation is sought.
Wa
∆V = − Pn
L
L = Span
____
For the first advance
1281.58 × 2.44
∆V = − 66.75 = + 46.96 KN.
27.5
____
For second advance.
1415 × 1.524
∆V = − 133.5 = − 55.08 KN.
27.5
= 567.37 KN
EXAM PL E NO. 5:- Calculate the maximum bending moment at the points C and D if five loads of
410 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
5 of 160 KN
7m 7m 14 m
5.25
(+)
y1 y2 y3 y4 y5
ILD for Mc
(+)
y1 y2 y3 y4 y5
ILD for Md
M CM ax
Line-up all loads upto point C (theoretically slightly to right of C). Give advances at point C and
compare average loading in portion AC and BC due to various advances.
Portion Ac Portion Bc
160 4 × 160
< after 1st advance.
7 21
2 × 160 3 × 160
> after 2nd advance.
7 21
So, as the second load of 160 KN crosses ponit C, reversal is obtained. So for (Mc)max, this load
INFLUENCE LINES 411
should be brought back and placed at C (position before 2nd advance or after 1st advance). Compute
influence co-efficients.
y4 = 4.49, y5 = 4.11
(M d)max
This section is mid span of beam. Clearly applying the criteria of maximum bending moment at
D (comparing Average loadings on AB and BD), we get
Span AD Span BD
160 4 × 160
< after 1st advance
14 14
2 × 160 3 × 160
< after 2nd advance
14 14
3 × 160 2 × 160
> after 3rd advance.
14 14
So position before 3rd advance (or after 2nd advance) will give us (Md)max. Place the loads
accordingly and compute influence co-efficients.
y1 = y5 = 5.48 y2 = y4 = 6.24 y3 = 7
= 4870.4 KN-m
EXAM PL E NO.6:
Calculate maximum axial forces induced in members 1, 2, 3 and 4 of truss already shown if five
loads of 150 KN each spaced at 1.52m corsses at the bottom chord from right to left. Take h = 2m and
span = 5d = 10 meters.
412 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
5 of 160 KN
5 of 160 KN
(+)
1m (+)
1m
(-)
160
+0.565
1.52 1.53
y1 (+) y3
INFLUENCE LINES 413
S1max.
The shape of ILD for S1 resembles with the shape of ILD for Mc in an equivalent simple beam.
So giving advances at C (now forget the truss and play with ILD’ s only). Apply the criterion for
maximum moment at C.
Portion Ac Portion Bc
160 4 × 160
< after 1st advance.
4 6
2 × 160 3 × 160
= after 2nd advance.
4 6
Considering equality as a reversal, S1max will be obtained for position before second advance (or
after 1st advance). Place loads accordingly and compute influence co-efficients.
y1 = .744, y2 = 1.2 y3 = 0.896
y4 = 0.592 y5 = 0.288
So, S1max = 160 (0.744 + 1.2 + 0.896 + 0.592 + 0.288)
= − 595.2 KN (It is a compressive force)
S3max
Inspect the shape of ILD for S3. It resembles with the shape of ILD for moment at D
considering the truss to be a simple beam. So apply the criterion of maximum moment at D.
Portion AD Portion BD
160 3 × 160
< (last load not on span) after 1st advance.
6 4
2 × 160 3 × 160
< After 2nd advance.
6 4
3 × 160 2 × 160
= After 3rd Advance.
6 4
So for S3max, position before 3rd advance is valid (After second advance). Place the loads
accordingly and compute influence co-efficients.
y1 = 0.592, y2 = 0.893, y3 = 1.2,
y4 = 0.744, y5 = 0.288
(S3)max = 160 (0.592 + 0.893 + 1.2 + 0.744 + 0.288)
= 594.72 KN (It is a tensile force).
S2max
Inspect the shape of ILD for S2. It resembles with the shape of ILD for as shear force in a
intermediate panel of a panelled girder. So for evaluating S2max, we apply the criterion of maximum
intermediate panel shear. Advance is made at D or F.
W/ W
<
d L
160 5 × 160
= after 1st advance.
2 10
So for S2max, the leading load should be placed at maximum ordinate, only three loads will be
414 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
v P = 1.0
a
A B
c c b
//
C
b 2*
*
2
1 * c
a *
1
Ra Rb
/
C
b/L
y
* = 1/L
c
RA RB
a/L
* = 1/L /
C
If we take P = 1
V = y*
1
Or θ =
L
Case 2: I.L.D for bending moment at the same section. Write work equation and equate to zero.
Mθ* 1 + Mθ* 2 − Va θ* 1 + Vb θ* 2 − Py* = 0
416 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
or M (θ* 1 + θ* 2) − 0 − Py* = 0
Py
M (θ* ) = Py* or M = . If P = 1 and θ = 1 radian.
θ
than M = y*
So aθ* 1 = bθ* 2 Or θ* 1 + θ* 2 = 1
a * b
⇒ θ* 1 + θ1 = 1 ⇒ θ* 1 =
b L
a
θ* 2 =
L
V
P=1
RA M RB
b
C// * = 1 rad
/
C
a
yw
y
w
2* = a/L
* = b/L
1
A B
C C
a 1* = b 2*
b/L a/L
RA RB
2m 4m
1.0 = P
A C D B
Ra 6m Rc 6m Rb
4m 6m
0.6 0/10
0/10 0/10 2/40 B
C
0.4
2/10
D
418 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
A B
RA RB
If support at A is removed,
this will be deflected shape.
aL
1/3 (L - x)
∆XL =
1 P (l − X)2 l − 1 (l − X)
EI 2 3
fXX
Now consider load under
redundant Ra = 1
(deflected shape) of BDS
Ra = 1
L B.M.D. for Ra = 1
(+) 2
L /2
L/3
fXX = EI 2 (l )2 3 = 3EI
1 1 2l l3
Equation for compatibility
∆al − fXX Ra = 0 because A is a support. Net deflection should be zero.
INFLUENCE LINES 419
Rb = 1 − Ra (equilibrium requirement)
X(3l 2 − X 2)
So we get Rb =
2l 3
We know
Mb = Ra × L − P (l − x) . Put value of Ra and simplify
PX(l 2 − X 2)
Mb = This expression will help in plotted ILD for Mb
2l 2
I L D for Ra
Mb
P=1
X (L - X)
A B
Ra Rb
10m
5/16
O
1.0
ILD for Rb
3/16 l
2 2
PX (l - X )
Mb = 2
2l
I L D for M b
Ral − P(l − X) + Mb = 0
Mb = 1(l − X) − Ral
10.20. I L D for shear at Section mn:
Mb
P
X
m
Load to right of A B
mn, Vmn = Ra x a
it mean ILD for Vmn
will be same as ILD n
for Ra multiplied by Ra Rb
a for this portion a = 4m 10m b = 6m
m
Mb
1.0 m
A B
Vmn c
n
Ra Rb
Load on left of mn I.L.D. for Ra x a
1.0
Vmn = Rb x b
for this portion, ILD for (+)
Vmn is same is ILD
for Rb x b
I.L.D. for Ra x b
1.0
10.21. I L D for M mn
Consider a hinge where ILD for moment desired.
P=1
A B C
10m 6m
INFLUENCE LINES 421
P=1
X
B
A C
Ra Rb Rc
L1 L2
X P=1
X
Compatibility equation at point B.
Rb δbb − Py = 0 y
P= 1 State-II
y
Rb = Rb = 1.0
δbb
a b
1.0
C
B
y
Rb Ra
l l
X //
C
δbb
Pab
l
//
B
PbX 2
y = (l − b2 − X 2) (X = 0 − a)
6EI l
PaX 2
y = (l − a2 − X 2) (X = 0 − b)
6EI l
l 2X(l 2 − l 22 − X 2)
y =
6EI l
l 2X (l 2 − l 22 − l 12)
δbb =
6EI l
l 12 l 22
δbb =
3EI l
Rb = X (l − l21 − X )
2 2 2
and
2l 1 l 2
X = 0 − l1 with Origin at A
X (l − l − X )
2
1
2 2
Rb = 2 2 X = 0 to l 2
(2l l ) 1 2
Origin at C
INFLUENCE LINES 423
P=1
B
A C
We know L1 = 10m L2 = 6m
l1 + l2 = L
I.L.D for Rb
1.0
P=1
B
A C
Compatibility at A
Ra δaa − Py = 0 1.0
(+)
y
Ra = y
δaa
B
A C
1.0
1.0
B
l2
l
X (l 2 − l 22 − X 2) X (162 − 62 − X 2)
Rb = = by putting values of L 1l 1 and l 2
(2 × l 12 × l 2) 2 × 102 × 6
424 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
X Rb Ra Rc
0 0
1 0.1825
2 0.36
3 0.5275
4 0.68
5 0.8125
6 0.92
10
0 Calculate
1 yourself
ILD for Ra can be obtained from ILD for Rb. Taking moments about C is equality to zero.
Ral + Rb × l 2 − P(l − X) = 0
l − X
Ra = P
Rb l 2
So
l − l
(l 1 − X)
and Rb = (2l 1 l − l 1 X − X 2)
2l 12 l
INFLUENCE LINES 425
Ma Mb
P = 1.0
A B
Ra X (L - X) Rb
Ma Mb
P BDS under
A B State-I redundant
moment.
Ra Rb
1.0
At fixed support,
θa = 0 θaa y
A B State-II
4EI (-)
l
2EI
(+) l
1 rad
1 rad
424 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
CHAPTER EL EVEN
a P1 P3 linear arch
y Hy
A B
H given arch y H
X
Va Vb
Bending moment at X is
M X = VaX − Hy − P1(X − a)
M X = µX − Hy. (Eddy’ s theorem)
THREE HINGED ARCHES 425
µc
SO H = (2)
Yc
V
Cutting the arch as shown, and projecting forces P 2 I
along axis 1−1 and 2−2 and putting V = V a − P1 θ
we have. H
I 2
P = H Cosθ + VSinθ (3) along 1−1
H
Q = H Sin θ − Vcos θ (4) along 2 − 2
Va
C
∑ Ma = 0
Vb × 20 = 50 × 10 × 5 4m
y
2500 H=312.5 A B H=312.5
Vb = = 125 KN
20 X
V a + V b = 50 × 10 = 500 KN Ra
20
So V a = 500 − V b = 500 − 125 Va=375 Vb=125
= 375 KN
THREE HINGED ARCHES 427
X = 5m from B.
So putting value of X in M X expression above.
M max = − 125 × 5 + 12.5(5)2
= − 625 + 312.5
M max = − 312.5 KN−m
SOL UTI ON: Considering Circular Arch
EXAM PL E NO.2: Now or Solve the following loaded thr ee hinged Cir cular Ar ch
50 KN/m
y
4m
H=312.5 A X B H=312.5
20m
Va=375 Vb=125
Step 1. Reactions:
As before reactions are same.
Step 2. Equation of Cir cular Ar ch
The general equation is (X − h)2 + (y − k)2 = r 2
h and k are co-ordinates at the centre and r is radius of Circle. There are three unknown in
above equation, Viz, h, k and r and these can be determined from the following boundary conditions.
Origin is at point A.
Boundar y conditions
1. At X = 0, y= 0 It gives (−h)2 + (−k)2 = r 2
h2 + k2 = r 2 (1)
2. At X= 20, y= 0 It gives (20 − h) + (−k2) = r 2
2
100 + h2 − 20h + 16 + k2 − 8k = r 2
116 + h2 − 20h + k2 − 8k = r 2 (3)
Subtract (1) from (2) we get
400 − 40h = 0
Or h = 10
THREE HINGED ARCHES 429
[
= 375X − 25X 2 − 312.5 − 10.5 + 110.25 − X 2 + 20X ]
M X = 375X − 25X 2 + 3281.25 − 312.5 110.25 − X 2 + 20X
430 THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
dM X 312.5 (− 2X + 20)
= 0 = − 125 −
dX 2 110.25 − X 2 + 20X
+ 312.5(X − 10)
or 0 = − 125
110.25 − X 2 + 20X
20 ± 400 − 284
X=
2
20 ± 10.77
X= = 15.385m from A Put this value of X in M X expression above.
2
11.5. Der ivation for center -line of a par abolic ar ch with suppor ts at differ ent levels.
yc
A
h
y
B
X
L/2 L/2
y = aX 2 + bX + c
At X = o; Y = o, (Point B) So C = o (1)
At X = L; Y = h, (Point A) So h = aL 2 + bL (2)
L Y = yc + h, (Point C) aL 2 bL
At X = ; So yc + h = + (3) multiply by 4
2 4 2
h = aL 2 + bL (2)
h − 4(yc + h) = − bL or 4 h
b= (yc + h) −
L L
Now all constant have been evaluated in general terms. Put Values of a, b and c in general
equation; we have
− 2X 2 (h + 2yc) X (4yc + 3h)
y = 2 + . This is the generalized equation for a parabolic arch
L L
with supports at different levels. Test this derived equation and see whether boundary conditions are
satisfied.
− At X = o; y = o, put this in above equation. It is satisfied
− At X = L, y = h, put this in above equation. It is satisfied
L
− At X = , y = h + yc, put this in above equation. It is also satisfied.
2
If supports are at the same level, h = o Put this in above equation, we get
− 4ycX 2 4 ycX 4ycX
y= + or y = (L − X), after simplification.
L2 L L2
dy 4yc
and = 2 (L − 2X)
dX L
These two equations have already been used. Now we solve some Example.
EXAM PL E NO.3:-
Solve the following 3 hinged parabolic loaded arch with supports at different levels as shown.
40 KN/m
yc = 9m
A
H
Va h = 3m
B
H
∑Fy = 0
V A + V b = 40 (45) = 1800 KN (1)
= 5785 KN-m
dM bc
= 0 = 514.3 − 964.315 + 20X
dX
= 20X = 450
A yc=9m
y = 3m
y
B
X
L/2 = 45 L/2 = 45
at X = 0, y = 0 ~ h2 + k2 = R2 − (1)
at X = 45 , y = yc + δ = 12
y= R2 − (X − h)2 + k
Point C: At X = 45 , y = 12
Point A: At X = 90 , y = 3
EXAM PL E NO. 4: Calculate maximum moments in portion AC & BC for the following 3-hinged
loaded Circular each.
40 KN/m
9m
1928.63 A
y
3m
1285.7
1928.63
X B
514.3
−b ± b2 − 4ac
X =
2a